Command Line Interface Guide R3.1 PDF

Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction
PRELIMINARY
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 1850
Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and TSS-160) | Release 3.1
Command Line Interface Guide
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent Internal
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
ISSUE 1
JUNE 2009
PRELIMINARY

Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
ot to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Conformance statements
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Part 15 Class A
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protections against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at the users expense.
Security statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,
applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any
allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Limited warranty
PRELIMINARY
Alcatel-Lucent provides a limited warranty for this product. For more information, consult your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team.
About this document

Purpose ........................................................................................................................................................................................... xxi
xxi
Reason for revision .................................................................................................................................................................... xxi
xxi
PRELIMINARY
Contents
xxiii
Intended audience .................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii
Supported systems ................................................................................................................................................................... xxiii
xxiii
How to use this information product
................................................................................................................................ xxiii
xxiv
Conventions used ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxiv
Related information .................................................................................................................................................................. xxv
xxv
xxvi
Technical support ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxvi
How to order .............................................................................................................................................................................. xxvi
xxvi
How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxvi
xxvi
1
Introduction
The Command Line Interface ................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1-1
avigation and manipulation
................................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1-5
The help command .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-9

1-9
Command Line Interface top-level structure ................................................................................................................. 1-12
CLI command indexes ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-14
1-14
1-25
CLI command definition ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-25
2
Equipment management commands

2-1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
eqpt position naming_set_list show type
................................................................................................... 2-2
................................................................................................................. 2-5
eqpt position naming_set_list asap asap_userlabel
..................................................................................... 2-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
iii
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
eqpt position naming_set_list type eqpt_type
PRELIMINARY
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eqpt position naming_set_list show asap
................................................................................................................. 2-6
eqpt position naming_set_list show allowedeqpt .................................................................................................. 2-7

eqpt position naming_set_list show info .................................................................................................................. 2-9
eqpt position naming_set_list show ri
eqpt position naming reset
eqpt show allpositions
eqpt show linkstatus
eqpt show nename
.................................................................................................................... 2-10
.................................................................................................................................................. 2-11
........................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-12
............................................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-14
................................................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2-15
eqpt prot manualswitch from naming to naming

eqpt prot show unit naming
...................................................................................................... 2-16
................................................................................................................................................ 2-17
extpoint in extpointin_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel

extpoint in extpointin_naming asap asap_userlabel
extpoint in extpointin_naming show asap
.............................................................. 2-18
.................................................................................. 2-18
............................................................................................................. 2-19
2-20
extpoint show in ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-20
extpoint out extpointout_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel
......................................................... 2-21
extpoint out extpointout_naming criteria {manual | remote | auto {eventtype_id |

eventtype_name}} .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-22
extpoint show out
.................................................................................................................................................................... 2-23
2-23
extpoint show outeventslist .................................................................................................................................................. 2-24

2-24
3
Ethernet physical and GFP management commands

3-1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
General interface management
PRELIMINARY
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3

3-3
interface show [naming_set_list]
................................................................................................................................ 3-3
interface trafficshow [naming_set_list]
.................................................................................................................... 3-4
Ethernet physical management

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
iv
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
interface position naming_set_list localeth defaulttype
..................................................................................... 3-6
interface position naming_set_list localeth show mauinfo
............................................................................... 3-8
interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg {enable | disable} ........................................................ 3-9

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg restart
............................................................................ 3-10
interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg advertisedcapability

interface position naming_set_list localeth show autoneg
PRELIMINARY
Contents
................................................ 3-10
.............................................................................. 3-11
interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfcsfaction {none | shutdown}
........................................... 3-12
interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfssfaction {none | shutdown} ............................................ 3-13

interface position naming_set_list localeth show rcfaction
............................................................................ 3-14
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set localeth trafficstatus {enable | disable} ........ 3-14

interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set localeth show trafficconditioning ................... 3-15
GFP management
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-17
3-17
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth sl {auto | eqptnonspec}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth csf
....................................................... 3-17
............................................................................................... 3-18
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth asap asap_userlabel
..................................................... 3-19
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth trafficstatus {enable | disable}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show trafficconditioning
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show mappinginfo
......................................... 3-20
.................................................... 3-20
................................................................ 3-21
Ethernet over PDH module management

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-23
3-23
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh rate {e1 | ds1 | e3 | ds3} .................................................. 3-23
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh crc {enable | disable}
...................................................... 3-24
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh lbo lbo_value ................................................................. 3-26

interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh linecoding {b8zs | ami} .................................................. 3-27
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh signalmode {esf | sf | cbit | m23} ................................ 3-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
v
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh rxsensitivity {longhaul | shorthaul} ........................... 3-25
PRELIMINARY
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh config

interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh show
4
.................................................................................... 3-29
...................................................................................... 3-30
Ethernet port management commands

4-1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Ethernet port management over MAU
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-3
interface position naming_set_list localeth {activate | deactivate}
................................................................ 4-3
interface position naming_set_list localeth portservice {ets | bridge | mpls}

interface position naming_set_list localeth maxmtu mtu_value
............................................. 4-4
.................................................................. 4-5
interface position naming_set_list localeth defaultflowcontrol {nopause | asympause |

4-6
asym&sympause} ................................................................................................................................................................... 4-6
interface position naming_set_list localeth ethasap asap_userlabel ...................................................... 4-7
interface position naming_set_list localeth config
............................................................................................... 4-7
interface position naming_set_list localeth show ethinfo
.................................................................................. 4-9
Ethernet port management over GFP

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4-11
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth {activate | deactivate} .......................................................... 4-11

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth portservice {ets | bridge | mpls | iw}
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth maxmtu mtu_value
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth config
.............................. 4-12
........................................................... 4-13
........................................................................................ 4-14
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show ethinfo
........................................................................... 4-15
VLA profile and Layer2 frames management
PRELIMINARY
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4-17
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set vlanprotprofile bind
............................................ 4-17
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set vlanprotprofile default ........................................ 4-19

interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set vlanprotprofile activate
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set vlanprotprofile show
...................................... 4-20
........................................... 4-21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
vi
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set l2ctrlframe
.............................................................. 4-22
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show vlanprotprofile
........................................... 4-24
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show vlanset ........................................................... 4-25

interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show l2ctrlframe ................................................... 4-26
vlanprotprofile activate
PRELIMINARY
Contents
......................................................................................................................................................... 4-27
4-27
vlanprotprofile delete vlanprotprof_userlabel
............................................................................................... 4-28
vlanprotprofile show [vlanprotprof_userlabel]
............................................................................................. 4-28
Ethernet flow and Ethernet flow QOS management commands

5-1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Classifiers
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-2
inflowclassifier add flow_userlabel
............................................................................................................................ 5-2
inflowclassifier remove classifier_id
....................................................................................................................... 5-4
inflowclassifier show [flow_userlabel]
..................................................................................................................... 5-5
Color profile
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5-6
colorprofile activate colorprof_userlabel .............................................................................................................. 5-6
colorprofile delete colorprof_userlabel
................................................................................................................. 5-7
colorprofile show [colorprof_userlabel]
............................................................................................................... 5-8
Traffic descriptor
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5-9
5-9
trafficdescriptor activate .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
trafficdescriptor delete trafficdescriptor_userlabel ................................................................................. 5-11
trafficdescriptor show [trafficdescriptor_userlabel] ............................................................................... 5-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
vii
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
trafficdescriptor config [trafficdescriptor_userlabel] ............................................................................. 5-11
PRELIMINARY
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Services management commands

6-1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
General flow management
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6-3
flow show
..................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6-3
ETS-to-Provider bridge ETS/PW/VPLS bidirectional flow

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6-5
pbflowbid activate flow_userlabel port
..................................................................................................................... 6-5
pbflowbid config flow_userlabel
................................................................................................................................. 6-9
pbflowbid delete flow_userlabel
............................................................................................................................... 6-10
pbflowbid show [flow_userlabel] [flowtype { pb | pw | vpls }]
.................................................................... 6-10
ETS-to-ETS bidirectional transparent mapping

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-12
6-12
portportbid activate flow_userlabel port1 naming port2 naming
............................................................... 6-12
portportbid delete flow_userlabel
............................................................................................................................. 6-13
portportbid show [flow_userlabel]
........................................................................................................................... 6-14
ETS-to-Provider bridge ETS/PW/VPLS ingress unidirectional flow

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6-15
pbflowinunidir activate flow_userlabel port

pbflowinunidir config flow_userlabel
......................................................................................................... 6-15
..................................................................................................................... 6-19
pbflowinunidir delete [flow_userlabel] ................................................................................................................... 6-20

pbflowinunidir show [flow_userlabel] [flowtype { pb | pw | vpls }]
........................................................... 6-20
PRELIMINARY
Provider bridge/PW/VPLS to ETS egress unidirectional flow

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-21
6-21
pbflowoutunidir activate flow_userlabel ................................................................................................................ 6-21

pbflowoutunidir delete flow_userlabel
................................................................................................................... 6-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
viii
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pbflowoutunidir show [flow_userlabel] [flowtype { pb | pw | vpls }] ......................................................... 6-23

Dual-Homing management
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-25
6-25
cbpdu activate flow_userlabel port
......................................................................................................................... 6-25
cepst activate port naming [pathcost port_path_cost]
PRELIMINARY
Contents
...................................................................................... 6-27
cepst deactivate port naming .............................................................................................................................................. 6-28

6-28
sbpdu activate flow_userlabel port naming
......................................................................................................... 6-29
vrrp activate flow_userlabel port naming {svlan vlan_id | pw pw_id}

7
................................................ 6-31
MAC/Virtual/Provider bridge port and bridge port QOS management commands

Generic configuration
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7-1
bridge type {virtual | provider | none}
bridge show type
.............................................................................................................................. 7-1
........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7-2
bridge qos mode {5p3d | 8p0d}
............................................................................................................................................ 7-2
VLA registration entry management

7-3
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
bridge vlan activate vlan_set
bridge vlan delete vlan_set
............................................................................................................................................ 7-3
................................................................................................................................................ 7-5
bridge vlan add vlan_set ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-6

bridge vlan remove vlan_set
............................................................................................................................................. 7-7
bridge vlan show [vlan_set]
.............................................................................................................................................. 7-9
Bridge port management

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-10
7-10
.................................................................................... 7-10
bridge port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show info [vlan vlan_set]

bridge vlanprotprofile bind vlanprotprof_userlabel
......................................... 7-12
..................................................................................... 7-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
ix
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
bridge port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set config
PRELIMINARY
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
bridge port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set vlanprotprofile bind vlanprotprof_userlabel

............................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-147-14
7-14
bridge vlanprotprofile default [port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set]
................................................. 7-15
bridge vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value] ........................ 7-16
bridge vlanprotprofile delete vlanprotprof_userlabel
.................................................................................. 7-17
bridge vlanprotprofile show [vlanprotprof_userlabel]
................................................................................ 7-17
Ethernet switch management commands

Filtering database general parameters
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8-1
bridgedbfiltering agetime filterDbAgeTime_value .............................................................................................. 8-1
bridgedbfiltering show agetime
............................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8-2
bridgedbfiltering vlan config vlan_set [learning {enable | disable}] [flooding {enable | disable}]
bridgedbfiltering vlan show vlan_set info
....... 8-3
................................................................................................................... 8-3
Filtering database entries management

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8-4
bridgedbfiltering delete mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id] ............................................................................................. 8-4
bridgedbfiltering activate mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id] [portout
naming_set_list_lagnumber_set] ....................................................................................................................... 8-5
bridgedbfiltering show unicast-dynamic
........................................................................................................................... 8-7
bridgedbfiltering show unicast-static .................................................................................................................................. 8-8

bridgedbfiltering show multicast-static
............................................................................................................................. 8-9
bridgedbfiltering show multicast-dynamic

9
.................................................................................................................... 8-10
Spanning Tree Protocol management commands
PRELIMINARY
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9-1
stp enable {rstp | mstp}
stp disable
............................................................................................................................................................ 9-2
9-2
..................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9-3
stp show type
............................................................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
stp config ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-4

9-4
stp show info [vlan vlan_set] ............................................................................................................................................ 9-6
stp port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set config .............................................................................................. 9-7
stp port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show info [vlan vlan_set] ................................................... 9-9
mstp region
PRELIMINARY
Contents
................................................................................................................................................................................ 9-11
9-11
mstp show region ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9-12

9-12
mstp cist config
........................................................................................................................................................................ 9-13
9-13
mstp cist show info
................................................................................................................................................................. 9-14
9-14
mstp msti mstp_instance_set activate

mstp msti mstp_instance_set delete
.................................................................................................................... 9-15
........................................................................................................................ 9-16
mstp msti mstp_instance_set config [pri bridge_pri]
................................................................................. 9-16
mstp msti mstp_instance_set show info
................................................................................................................ 9-17
mstp msti mstp_instance vlan vlan_set
............................................................................................................... 9-19
mstp show msti [vlan vlan_set] ..................................................................................................................................... 9-19

mstp show vlan [msti mstp_instance_set]
............................................................................................................ 9-20
mstp cist port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set config
............................................................................... 9-21
mstp cist port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show info

mstp msti mstp_instance_set port config
mstp msti port show info
10
........................................................................ 9-23
.............................................................................................................. 9-24
...................................................................................................................................................... 9-26
9-26
Link aggregation management commands

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10-1
linkagg activate
linkagg config
........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-2
10-2
........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-3
10-3
linkagg delete lagnumber_set
....................................................................................................................................... 10-5
linkagg show [lagnumber_set]
..................................................................................................................................... 10-6
linkagg port naming_set_list bind lagnumber [pri port_lnkaggpri]
................................................. 10-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
xi
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
linkagg config neprio ne_pri ............................................................................................................................................ 10-5
PRELIMINARY
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
linkagg port naming_set_list config pri port_lnkaggpri

linkagg port naming_set_list unbind
....................................................................................................................... 10-8
linkagg port naming_set_list show info

11
.......................................................................... 10-7
................................................................................................................. 10-8
Port segregation management commands

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11-1
portseg activate [seg portseg_id] [port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set]
..................................... 11-1
portseg add [seg portseg_id] port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set ................................................. 11-2

portseg remove [seg portseg_id] port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set
portseg delete [seg portseg_set]
.................................................................................................................................. 11-4
portseg show info [seg portseg_set]

12
.......................................................................................................................... 11-5
Ethernet Link OAM

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12-1
linkoam position naming_set_list {enable | disable}

linkoam position config
........................................................................................ 12-2
....................................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12-2
linkoam position naming_set_list show localeth
................................................................................................ 12-3
linkoam position naming_set_list show peereth
................................................................................................. 12-4
linkoam position naming_set_list show linkoamtstats
..................................................................................... 12-4
linkoam position naming_set_list remoteloopback {enable | disable}

linkoam position naming_set_list eventconfig
linkoam position naming_set_list show log
........................................................................................ 12-6
......................................................................................................... 12-7
Ethernet OAM
Overview
PRELIMINARY
....................................................... 12-5
.................................................................................................... 12-5
linkoam position naming_set_list show eventconfig
13
............................................... 11-3
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13-1
ethoam activate md_userlabel [level md_level] [md_mip_creation {none | explicit | implicit}]

ethoam config md_userlabel [level md_level] [md_mip_creation {none | explicit | implicit}]
ethoam delete md_userlabel
..... 13-2
........ 13-2
......................................................................................................................................... 13-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
xii
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ethoam show md_userlabel
........................................................................................................................................... 13-3
ethoam md md_userlabel activate

ethoam md md_userlabel config
.............................................................................................................................. 13-4
................................................................................................................................. 13-5
ethoam md md_userlabel delete ma_userlabel
................................................................................................. 13-5
ethoam md md_userlabel show [ma_userlabel]
PRELIMINARY
Contents
............................................................................................... 13-6
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel add remote-mepid mep_set
............................................. 13-6
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel remove remote-mepid mep_set ...................................... 13-7

ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id activate port .................................................. 13-8
ethoam md md_ userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id config port
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id delete
..................................................
13-9
............................................................ 13-10
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id show .............................................................. 13-11

ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id loopback remote {macAddr | mep_id}
13-12
[pri pri] ................................................................................................................................................................................ 13-12
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id loopback show
......................................... 13-13
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id linktrace remote {macAddr | mep_id} [ttl
ttl_value] ....................................................................................................................................................................... 13-13
13-13
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id linktrace show
ethoam etype config {ethertype_value | reset}
ethoam etype show
14
........................................... 13-14
......................................................................................................... 13-15
............................................................................................................................................................... 13-15
13-15
VPLS management
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14-1
vpls activate vpls_userlabel [portset naming_set_list_lagnumber_set ] [pwset pw_set]

vpls delete vpls_userlabel
14-2
.......................................................................................................................................... 14-3
vpls config vpls_userlabel [learning {enable | disable}] [unkdiscarding {enable | disable}]
............ 14-3
......................................................................................................................................... 14-4
vpls add vpls_userlabel [portset naming_set_list_lagnumber_set] [pwset pw_set] ............. 14-4

vpls remove vpls_userlabel [portset naming_set_list_lagnumber_set] [pwset pw_set]
.....
14-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
xiii
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
vpls show [vpls_userlabel]
...
PRELIMINARY
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vpls static vpls_userlabel add mac macAddr port {naming | lagnumber}
........................................... 14-6
vpls static vpls_userlabel remove mac macAddr port {naming | lagnumber} .................................... 14-7
vpls static vpls_userlabel show mac macAddr port {naming | lagnumber}
15
........................................ 14-8
Virtual output port management

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1
15-1
Interface management
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-3
15-3
qos position naming_set_list portshaping { disable | port_shaping_rate} [offset offset_size]

............................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-315-3
15-3
qos position naming_set_list show shaping
......................................................................................................... 15-4
Virtual transport management

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-5
15-5
qos port {naming | lagnumber} enable
...................................................................................................................... 15-5
qos port {naming | lagnumber} disable vt_set

qos port {naming | lagnumber} config
..................................................................................................... 15-6
...................................................................................................................... 15-7
qos port {naming | lagnumber} show [0 | vt_set]

qos port vt bind service
............................................................................................... 15-9
...................................................................................................................................................... 15-10
15-10
qos port {naming | lagnumber} vt vtid unbind service

qos port {naming | lagnumber} vt vtid show service
................................................................................... 15-11
...................................................................................... 15-13
Virtual transport queue management

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-15
15-15
qos port vt config queue
..................................................................................................................................................... 15-15
PRELIMINARY
qos port {naming | lagnumber} vt vtid show queue queuenumber
.......................................................... 15-17
WRED profile management

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-18
15-18
qos wred activate
qos wred config
................................................................................................................................................................. 15-18
15-18
.................................................................................................................................................................... 15-19
15-19
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
xiv
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
qos wred delete wred_userlabel
............................................................................................................................... 15-21
qos wred show wred_userlabel
................................................................................................................................ 15-21
Performance monitoring management commands

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1
16-1
PRELIMINARY
Contents
Maintenance measurement collection

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-2
16-2
pmmaint show port naming_set_list
....................................................................................................................... 16-2
pmmaint show service flow_userlabel
.................................................................................................................... 16-3
pmmaint show ethphy naming_set_list
.................................................................................................................. 16-4
QOS measurement collection

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-5
16-5
pmqos port naming_set_list activate period {15min | 1h | 24h}

pmqos port naming_set_list delete period {15min | 1h | 24h}
................................................................... 16-5
...................................................................... 16-6
pmqos port naming_set_list show currentdata period {15min | 1h | 24h}
................................................ 16-7
pmqos port naming_set_list config period {15min | 1h | 24h} reset {enable | disable} ....................... 16-8
pmqos port naming_set_list show historydata period {15min | 1h | 24h} ................................................. 16-9
pmqos service flow_userlabel activate period {15min | 1h | 24h}
............................................................. 16-10
pmqos service flow_userlabel config period {15min | 1h | 24h} reset {enable | disable}
pmqos service flow_userlabel delete period {15min | 1h | 24h}
................. 16-10
................................................................. 16-11
pmqos service flow_userlabel show currentdata period {15min | 1h | 24h }
......................................... 16-11
pmqos service flow_userlabel show historydata period {15min | 1h | 24h} ........................................... 16-12
17
Support management commands

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-1
17-1
Overview
alarmlist
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
xv
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Alarm list and log management
PRELIMINARY
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarmsynth [domain domain_name] | [severity severity_name]

log info
.................................................................... 17-5
........................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-6
17-6
log alarm
..................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-6
17-6
17-8
log event ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-8
Alarm profile management
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-11
17-11
severitydef config severity ........................................................................................................................................... 17-11

severitydef show .................................................................................................................................................................... 17-12
17-12
alarmprofile create alarmprofile_userlabel
................................................................................................... 17-12
alarmprofile delete alarmprofile_userlabel
................................................................................................... 17-13
alarmprofile config alarmprofile_userlabel
.................................................................................................. 17-14
alarmprofile rename alarmprofile_userlabel into alarmprofile_userlabel

alarmprofile show [alarmprofile_userlabel]
.......................... 17-14
................................................................................................. 17-15
Agent management
17-16
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-16
ne location nelocation
................................................................................................................................................... 17-16
ne label ne_userlabel
.................................................................................................................................................... 17-17
17-17
ne mgr {B$ | E$} ................................................................................................................................................................... 17-17
ne show info ............................................................................................................................................................................ 17-18
17-18
accessctrl show info
............................................................................................................................................................. 17-19
17-19
Auto provisioning
Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-20
17-20
PRELIMINARY
plugandplay {confirmed | full | no} ................................................................................................................................ 17-20

plugandplay show
18
................................................................................................................................................................. 17-21
17-21
Communication and routing management commands

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-1
18-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
xvi
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Agent address management

Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-2
18-2
ne show addr
............................................................................................................................................................................. 18-2
18-2
In-Fiber in-band management

Overview
PRELIMINARY
Contents
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-3
18-3
infiberinband activate port
................................................................................................................................................... 18-3
18-3
infiberinband delete port {naming | lagnumber} ..................................................................................................... 18-4

infiberinband show [port {naming | lagnumber}] ................................................................................................... 18-5
IP management plane: IP routing management
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-6
18-6
routingstatic activate ip ipAddr [ipmask ipAddrBitMask] port {naming | lagnumber}
19
..................... 18-6
routingstatic delete ip ipAddr
........................................................................................................................................... 18-7
routingstatic show [ip ipAddr]
......................................................................................................................................... 18-8
Utility commands
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19-1
administrator config
............................................................................................................................................................... 19-1
19-1
19-2
administrator show .................................................................................................................................................................. 19-2
administrator resourcefile load
view
........................................................................................................................................... 19-3
19-3
.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-3
19-3
administrator backup .............................................................................................................................................................. 19-5

19-5
administrator restore filename [-noecho] [-history]
20
............................................................................................... 19-5
Debug commands
Overview
.................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-1
20-1
................................................................................................................................................................. 20-1
20-1
debug mgrcli show info
....................................................................................................................................................... 20-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
xvii
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
debug ne show info
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
debug trap show info
.............................................................................................................................................................. 20-2
20-2
Glossary
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
xviii
Text conventions
...................................................................................................................................................... xxiv
xxiv
Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160 documentation set
1-1
Commands and groups .......................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1-2
Bit mapping
1-3
Bit mapping definitions
1-4
Alarm and cause relationship .............................................................................................................................. 1-24
............................................................. xxv
PRELIMINARY
List of tables
............................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1-22
........................................................................................................................................ 1-23
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
xix
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
About this document

About this document
Purpose
This document is a comprehensive resource for Command Line Interface (CLI)

commands that are supported on Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160.
Reason for revision
This document is being issued to include the following new CLI capabilities and
commands supported by Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160 Release 3.1:
Location
Revision
Issue
Chapter 3, Ethernet
physical and GFP
management commands
Removed the following commands:
Issue 1, June
2009
Chapter 3, Ethernet
physical and GFP
management commands
Add a new section, Ethernet over PDH module management

(p. 3-23), that contains eight new commands related to
ne maxmtumtu_value
ne show maxmtu
Issue 1, June
2009
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
xxi
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Location
Revision
Issue
Chapter 3, Ethernet
physical and GFP
management commands
Issue 1, June
2009
Chapter 4, Ethernet port

management commands
interface position naming_set_list localeth

loopback {line | internal} {enable | disable}

show loopback
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumberset localeth floodinglimit floodinglimit_

value
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth

ratelimited ratelimited_value

fcs {disable | enable}

flag {one | two}

errorframe {abortseq | fcs}

floodinglimit floodinglimit_value
Removed the
admittedfractionalrate admitted_fractional_rate
Issue 1, June
2009
command.
Chapter 5, Ethernet flow
and Ethernet flow QOS
management commands
flowgroup activate
flowgroup delete flowgroup_userlabel
flowgroup show [flowgroup_userlabel]
Chapter 13, Ethernet

OAM
Removed the
Chapter 13, Ethernet

OAM
Added the following commands:
Chapter 15, Virtual

output port management
PRELIMINARY
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel show

remote-mepid mep_set command.
ethoam etype show
qos port {naming | lagnumber} activate
qos port {naming | lagnumber} delete vt_

userlabel
Issue 1, June
2009
Issue 1, June
2009
Issue 1, June
2009
Issue 1, June
2009
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
xxii
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Location
Revision
Issue
Chapter 16, Performance

monitoring management
commands
Issue 1, June
2009
pmqos config granularity {15min | 1h}
pmqos show granularity
PRELIMINARY
About this document
Intended audience
This guide is a resource for anyone who will use the command line interface to administer
or configure Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160. Consult the Alcatel-Lucent 1850
Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and TSS-160), Release 3.1 Safety Guide to identify
individuals qualified to work on Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160.
When using this document it is assumed that the Operator knows:
Physical and operational details of the hardware, including all operating modes
supported by this Release
How to use a PC, the Windows operating system, and all necessary applications.
Service personnel skill
Service personnel must have an adequate technical background in telecommunications,

and in the equipment covered by this document, to properly install, operate, and maintain
the equipment. Documentation alone is insufficient without additional background and
experience.
Supported systems
This document applies to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160 product,
Release 3.1.
Software documentation is not modified unless a new software version is distributed to
customers. In order for documentation to be updated, the new software must contain
significant interface changes that affect the understanding of the previously explained
procedures.
Screen printouts included in the document may display a product release version. These
screens are not updated simply to update a release version. If the command entry or
response in printout has changed, the screen is updated,
How to use this information product
This document must be used in conjunction with the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport
Service Switch (TSS-320 and TSS-160), Release 3.1 TL1 User Provisioning Guide. This
document does not duplicate information contained in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
xxiii
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
This document describes configuration and administrations commands, and the options
available with this software release
PRELIMINARY
About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Service Switch (TSS-320 and TSS-160), Release 3.1 TL1 User Provisioning Guide. Safety
information is located in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and
TSS-160), Release 3.1 Safety Guide. Safety warnings and rules for EMC and ESD safety,
as well as warnings about operations that may damage equipment, are not duplicated in
this document.
When using this document it is assumed that the operator knows:
Physical and operational details of the hardware, including all operating modes
supported by Release 3.1
How to use a PC, the Windows operating system, and all necessary applications.
Conventions used
The following table contains the text conventions and usage guidelines for CLI
commands as they are used in this document.
Table 1
Text conventions
type of text
bold text
convention
Indicates basic command and keyword syntax.
Example: show eqpt link status
italicized text
Indicates user-specified information such as slot numbers, user labels,

password, names.
Example: show eqpt position naming
[]
Indicate optional parameters for a given command.
Straight Brackets
Example: vlan profile vlanprof_userlabel

[typeethertype_value]
Here, you can enter either of the following options:
vlan profile vlanprof_userlabel
vlan profile vlanprof_userlabel type

ethertype_value
{}
Indicate that the user must choose between one or more parameters.
Curly Braces
Example: interface naming

mau default type {10 | 100 | 1000}
PRELIMINARY
Here, you must choose one of the following:
interface naming mau default type 10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
xxiv
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1
Text conventions (continued)
type of text
convention
Used to separate the parameter choices within a command string.
Vertical Pipe
For example, the command string

interface naming mau default type {10 | 100 | 1000}
separates the choices 10, 100 and 1000.
PRELIMINARY
About this document
Examples:
""
Quotation Marks
Used to enclose text strings that contain spaces or characters. The

quotation marks are required input on the command line.
Example:
eqpt position naming_set_list asap "a b"
Related information
The following table lists the documents included in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and
TSS-160 documentation set.
Table 2

Title
8DG09019AAAATQZZA
Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and

TSS-160), Release 3.1 Product Information Planning Guide
8DG09019KAAATQZZA

TSS-160), Release 3.1 User Provisioning Guide
8DG09019DAAATQZZA

TSS-160), Release 3.1 TL1 User Provisioning Guide
8DG09019BAAAPCZZA

TSS-160), Release 3.1 TL1 Command Guide
8DG09019EAAATQZZA

TSS-160), Release 3.1 Command Line Interface Guide
8DG09019CAAATQZZA

TSS-160), Release 3.1 Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide
8DG09019FAAATQZZA

TSS-160), Release 3.1 Safety Guide
8DG09019GAAATQZZA

TSS-160), Release 3.1 Engineering Rules
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
xxv
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Part Number
PRELIMINARY
About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2

(continued)
Part Number
Title
8DG09019HAAATQZZA

TSS-160), Release 3.1 Installation Guide
8DG09019JAAATQZZA

TSS-160), Release 3.1 Turn-Up and Commissioning Guide
8DG25713AAAATQZZA

TSS-160), Release 1.0-3.1 Engineering and Ordering Information
8DG08501ACAAFMZZA

TSS-160), Release 3.1 Customer Release otes
8DG09021AAAADZZA

TSS-160), Release 3.1.X Document CD-ROM
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the
Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact
information.
How to order
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representative or use Online
Customer Support (OLCS) (http://support.alcatel-lucent.com) .
How to comment
PRELIMINARY
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.

alcatel-lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com) .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
xxvi
Introduction
1
PRELIMINARY
The Command Line Interface

Accessing the CLI
The Command Line Interface is accessed via a telnet session.

A Telnet connection requires TCP/IP connectivity between the Telnet host and
Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160.
When a CLI session is first opened, Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160 banner is
displayed, followed by the CLI prompt.
Users are required to enter a valid login and password before CLI access is granted.
The following example shows Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160 after a Telnet
session has been authenticated:
C:\>telnet <shelf IP addr> 1123
Login:ADMIN
Password:*****
Cli:ADMIN >
The parameters for a Telnet string command are:
The network element or shelf TCP/IP Address
The TCP/IP port number, fixed at 1123.

ote: Only one concurrent session is allowed.
The following example shows an attempt to connect to an unavailable device:
C:\>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
c:\>telnet 10.10.10.12 1123

Connecting To 10.10.10.13...Could not open connection to the host,
on port 1123:
Connect failed
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI access from the Craft Terminal
Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160 Release 3.1 does not support access to the
CLI via the craft terminal interface. Future releases of this product will support this
function.
User profiles
The CLI handles four user profiles: administrator, constructor, operator, viewer. Each user
profile has specific rights:
Administrator can perform all defined commands, including debug commands,

except:
ne mgr {B$ | E$}

Constructor can perform all defined commands, including debug commands.
Operator can perform all defined commands, except for:
ne mgr {B$ | E$}

Viewer can perform all get commands.
To gain access, a user that is starting a Telnet CLI session must provide a login and
password that has been defined in Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160.
Modify access privilege levels
CLI access privilege levels are viewed and modified using TL1 commands. For more
information, refer to RTRV-CMD-SECU (view) and ED-CMD-SECU (modify) in the
Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and TSS-160), Release 3.1 TL1
Command Guide. Each CLI command has a TL1 command code that is used to identify
the CLI command in these TL1 commands (RTRV-CMD-SECU and ED-CMD-SECU).
Example
The following example illustrates viewing and changing the access privilege level of
eqpt show allpositions.
ALCATEL@DROP-T-ANSI-> rtrv-cmd-secu::CLI_EQPT_SHOW_ALLPOSITIONS_CMD;
PRELIMINARY
DROP-T-ANSI 09-06-03 16:46:12

M P00209 COMPLD
"CLI_EQPT_SHOW_ALLPOSITIONS_CMD:READ"
/* rtrv-cmd-secu::CLI_EQPT_SHOW_ALLPOSITIONS_CMD [P00209] (2) */
;
ALCATEL@DROP-T-ANSI-> ed-cmd-secu::CLI_EQPT_SHOW_ALLPOSITIONS_
CMD:::PROV;
DROP-T-ANSI 09-06-03 16:46:18

P00210 COMPLD
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
1-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
/* ed-cmd-secu::CLI_EQPT_SHOW_ALLPOSITIONS_CMD:::PROV [P00210]
(2) */ ;
ALCATEL@DROP-T-ANSI-> rtrv-cmd-secu::CLI_EQPT_SHOW_ALLPOSITIONS_CMD;
DROP-T-ANSI 09-06-03 16:46:20

P00211 COMPLD
"CLI_EQPT_SHOW_ALLPOSITIONS_CMD:PROV"
/* rtrv-cmd-secu::CLI_EQPT_SHOW_ALLPOSITIONS_CMD [P00211] (2) */
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
CLI responses
The following examples show some specific and general CLI responses.
Example
The following example illustrates the message that is displayed when a Telnet session is
idle for more than 30 minutes:
Cli:ADMIN >
This terminal has been idle for 30 minutes.
It will be logged out if it remains idle for another 30 minutes.
Log out by the system
Connection to host lost.
ote: To resume the session, press Enter.

The following example illustrates the message that is displayed when an invalid
command (in the eqpt command group) is refused:
Cli:ADMIN (eqpt) > show eqpt
CLI msg: invalid parameters number
The following example illustrates the message that is displayed when output is too long to
be completely displayed in the configured Telnet display.
Press any key to continue (Q to quit)
The following example illustrates the message that is displayed when a command is
entered that is not supported by the current release:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > extpoint

Cli:ADMIN (extpoint) > show in
CLI msg: not yet supported command
Cli:ADMIN (extpoint) >
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Feedback messages
The following list of feedback messages can result from the entry of a CLI command that
is incorrect or incomplete.
ote: Some CLI commands do not have responses.
>> message: successful completed command !!
>> message: waiting - command in progress
>> error: timeout - not executed command
>> warning: already present value for AdminStatus of r1sr1sl6d0p1
>> error: bad command
>> error: missing parameter
>> error: invalid parameters number
Error: Out of range. Valid range is: dynamic,blocked,forwarding
>> error: db writing error for Stp BridgeHelloTime
>> message: partially completed command
Functions not supported by CLI
The CLI is not required for managing the following functions:
Support Domain
PRELIMINARY
Event Reporting The CLI does not manage spontaneous notifications from the
E.
PM Filtering The CLI does not manage filtering criteria for retrieving History
Data from the E.
CLI does not support the following management functions:
Support Domain:
Inhibit/Allow Logging
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
1-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Navigation and manipulation

Overview
The following information describes keystrokes and commands that manipulate

command-line operations, for example; changing the command group, going to the
beginning of a line, or going to the end of a line).
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
Editing help
The help edit command can be entered to obtain the following list of available editing
keystrokes:
Cli:ADMIN > help edit
Available editing keystrokes
Delete current character.....................Ctrl-d
Delete text up to cursor.....................Ctrl-u
Delete from cursor to end of line............Ctrl-k
Move to beginning of line....................Ctrl-a
Move to end of line..........................Ctrl-e
Get prior command from history...............Ctrl-p
Get next command from history................Ctrl-n
Move cursor left.............................Ctrl-b
Move cursor right............................Ctrl-f
Move back one word...........................Esc-b
Move forward one word........................Esc-f
Convert rest of word to uppercase............Esc-c
Convert rest of word to lowercase............Esc-l
Delete remainder of word.....................Esc-d
Delete word up to cursor.....................Ctrl-w
Transpose current and previous character.....Ctrl-t
Enter command and return to root prompt......Ctrl-z
Refresh input line...........................Ctrl-l
Command completion
For example, entering eqpt p from top level followed by the Tab key will display
available commands, beginning with eqpt p, as shown below.
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt p
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
The CLI supports a command completion feature. A command that has not been entered
completely, but has been entered to the point that it is unique from other commands, can
be completed by pressing the Tab key. If the command has not been entered to the point
that it is unique, a list of commands that match the current entry will be displayed.
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
position
Cli:ADMIN >
prot
ote: Tab is not shown on screen.

For the completion to be successful, the partially entered command must be unique.
Completion works for command groups, commands, and options, but not values.
Moving to the start or end of the Command Line
You can move your cursor to the start of the Command Line by pressing Ctrl+A.
You can move your cursor to the end of the Command Line press Ctrl+E.
In the following example the first underscore (_) indicates the position of the cursor after
pressing Ctrl+A. The second underscore indicates the position of the cursor after pressing
Ctrl+E.
Examples:
Cli:ADMIN (user) > changepwd
Cli:ADMIN (user) > changepwd
Terminating a command
You can terminate a command insertion by pressing Ctrl+C.

This can be useful in a situation where you are prompted for information that you are not
prepared to enter. You can abort the command and stop the continuing prompt to enter the
value.
The following example illustrates the screen displayed when a command is terminated.
Example:
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl25d0p1 show vlanset
PRELIMINARY
Show Vlan List of Port r1sr1sl25d0p1

-------------------------------------1 u, 2, 3,
Cli:ADMIN >
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl25d0p1 show vlanset (Ctrl+C)
Cli:ADMIN > # no command executed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
1-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Return to root prompt
You can enter a command and return to root prompt by pressing Ctrl+Z.
The following example illustrates the screen displayed when a you return to the root
prompt.
Example:
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
Cli:ADMIN > interface

Cli:ADMIN (interface) > position r1sr1sl25d0p1 show
Cli:ADMIN (interface - position - show) > vlanset
-------------------------------------1 u, 2, 3,
Cli:ADMIN (interface - position - show) > vlanset (Ctrl+Z)
-------------------------------------1 u, 2, 3,
Cli:ADMIN > # previous command executed; all nested command exited
Command history
You can press the up arrow key to move backward through previously entered commands.
You can move forward through the list to more recent commands by pressing the down
arrow key. Press Enter (to execute a command after it has been located).
In the following example, entering history will display recent command line entries.
Entering the number of a command in the history, preceded by an exclamation point (
"!2"), will repeat the command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > history

1 help edit
2 help commands
3 history
Cli:ADMIN > !2
Cli:ADMIN > help commands
alias
- Text substitution
broadcast
- Write message to all users logged in
Ex.: broadcast "Hello"
clear
- Clear the screen
date
- Display current date
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
echo
exit
help
history
logout
session
sleep
stty
tree
view
who
write
- Echo text typed in

- Exit intermediate mode
- Show command help
- Show command history
- Log off this system
- Change / display configuration parameters.
- Sleep for n seconds
- Terminal settings
- Show command tree
- View features
- Display users currently logged in
- Write text to another user
Go to the top level
To return to top command level, or to the next higher level in a nested command group,
type exit:
Example:
Cli:ADMIN
Cli:ADMIN
Cli:ADMIN
Cli:ADMIN
>
> eqpt
(eqpt) > exit
>
Command group navigation
From top level, you can enter a command group by entering the name of the desired
group.
PRELIMINARY
To view a list of the available command groups, you can enter help from the top level.
(See Help command access (p. 1-9).)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
1-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The help command

Help command access
Enter help or a question mark (?) at top level to view the available command groups for
Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160:
PRELIMINARY
The help command
Introduction
Cli:ADMIN > help

acessctrl
- accessctrl
acl
- acl
alarmlist
- Get the currently active alarm list
alarmprofile
- alarmprofile
alarmsynth
- Get a synthesis of current active alarms
autodiscovery
- autodiscovery
bridge
- bridge
bridgedbfiltering
- bridgedbfiltering
cbpdu
- cbpdu
colorprofile
- colorprofile
dcn
- dcn
debug
- debug
eqpt
- The commands in this domain are based on
equipment manag
ement specification and relevant MIB.
extpoint
flow
type o
- extpoint
- Allows to retrieve the flow index, user-label and
f all configured flows.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
flowgroup
- flowgroup
igmpforcedrep
- igmpforcedrep
igmpsnoop
- igmpsnoop
igmpstaticmgroups
- igmpstaticmgroups
inflowclassifier
- inflowclassifier
interface
- interface
intf
- intf
linkagg
- linkagg
log
- log
mgmtport
- mgmtport
mstp
- mstp
ne
- ne
ntp
- ntp
os
- Set the IP address and the UDP port for the OS
main / spare
ospfarea
- ospfarea
pbflowbid
- pbflowbid
pbflowinunidir
- pbflowinunidir
pbflowoutunidir
- pbflowoutunidir
plugandplay
- Get/Set the auto-provisioning mode on a NE
PRELIMINARY
The help command
Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pmmaint
pmqos
- pmmaint
- pmqos
portportbid
- portportbid
portseg
- portseg
resource
- resource
routing
- routing
routingstatic
- routingstatic
severitydef
- severitydef
stp
- stp
swpkg
- swpkg
trafficdescriptor
- trafficdescriptor
user
- user
vlanprotprofile
- vlanprotprofile
Help command execution
You can execute the help command from each command group selection. The following
example is shows the help command entered from the eqpt command group.
In the following example, the help command lists the available commands, and any
available nested command groups, in the command group.
Cli:ADMIN > acl
acl
- acl
add
- Create an Access Control Element in an Access Control Li
st.
create
- Create an Acces Control List.
delete
- Delete an Access Control List with its elements.
disable
- Disable an already created Access Control List.
enable
- Enable an already created Access Control List.
remove
- Delete an Access Control element of an Access Control Li
st, by indicating the index.
show
- Get info about all/one Access Control element of Access
Control List.
Cli:ADMIN (acl) >
PRELIMINARY
In the following example, executing "eqpt ?" at top level gives the same result as
executing help in the "eqpt" command group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
1-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt

eqpt
- The commands in this domain are based on equipment manag
ment specification and relevant MIB.
position
- Address to a specific equipment position

(slot).
PRELIMINARY
The help command
Introduction
prot
- ManualSwitch from eqptNaming1 to eqptNam

ing2 : it initiates / terminates a manua
l switch operation (either to main or sp
are protection unit).Show unit eqptNamin
g: get the information about a protectio
n unit of a protection group.
show
- Allows displaying some equipment positio
n information.
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt
ote: "?" is OT displayed on screen.

You can view the syntax for a command by entering help followed by the command (for
example, help eqpt position) starting from top level or help eqpt on the eqpt
command group selection.
This is shown in the following examples.
Cli:ADMIN > help eqpt position
position
(slot).
<eqptNaming>
- <String>
asap
- Set the Asap associated to an equippment position.
reset
- Perform board reset of an item in a specific equipment
position
show
- Show info of an equipment position (asap
, type, info, remote inventory).
type
- Configure an equipment expected in an equipment position
slot
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
The help command
Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cli:ADMIN > help eqpt

eqpt
- The commands in this domain are based on
equipment management specification and r
elevant MIB.
position
(slot).
prot
- ManualSwitch from eqptNaming1 to eqptNam
ing2 : it initiates / terminates a manua
l switch operation (either to main or sp
are protection unit).Show unit eqptNamin
g: get the information about a protectio
n unit of a protection group.
show
- Allows displaying some equipment positio
n information.
Cli:ADMIN >
Command Line Interface top-level structure

CLI command groups
PRELIMINARY
The following CLI command groups are available from the top level.
Table 1-1
Commands and groups
no.
Command/Group
y/n
no.
Command/Group
y/n
abnormalcond
---
25
log
accessctrl
26
mgmtport
acl
27
mstp
alarmlist
28
ne
alarmprofile
29
ntp
alarmsynth
30
os
autodiscovery
31
ospfarea
bridge
32
pbflowbid
bridgedbfiltering
33
pbflowinunidir
10
cbpdu
34
pbflowoutunidir
11
colorprofile
35
plugandplay
12
dcn
36
pmmaint
13
debug
37
pmqos
---
14
eqpt
38
portportbid
15
extpoint
39
portseg
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-12
Issue 1 June 2009
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-1
Commands and groups (continued)
no.
Command/Group
y/n
no.
Command/Group
y/n
16
flow
40
resource
17
flowgroup
41
routing
18
igmpforcedrep
42
routingstatic
19
igmpsnoop
43
severitydef
20
igmpstaticmgroups
44
stp
21
inflowclassifier
45
swpkg
22
interface
46
trafficdescriptor
23
intf
47
user
24
linkagg
48
vlanprotprofile
PRELIMINARY
Command Line Interface top-level structure
Introduction
ote: Three dashes ( --- ) mean that the command group is not available in the current
release. A check ( ) means that the command group is available.
You can execute a CLI command from top level, by entering the command preceded by
the name of the command group in which it should be executed.
You can also execute the commands directly in the command group.
Instead of entering a complete command with all its parameters, you can enter the
command without parameters and be prompted to complete the command with the
required and optional parameters.
For the optional parameters you can press enter to bypass the parameter without entering
a value.
ote: In the following chapters when /A is shown, it means that command has no
optional parameters (indexes definition) and the correct syntax is simply that of the
command name.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-13
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
CLI command indexes
Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI command indexes

Overview
aming formats can use specific symbols for "A D operation", "range interval", and "list
elements separation".
This Document considers only one naming format which is coherent with the operator
label specification document and uses ampersand ( & ), hyphen ( - ), comma ( , )
respectively for "A D operation", "range interval", "list elements separation".
Defined indexes
PRELIMINARY
The defined indexes indicate specific resources within CLI commands.

Index
Definition
ace_index
An integer value indicating an element of an ACL.
aceorder_number
An integer value, indicating the ordering position of execution of an Access

Control Element in an ACL.
adminkey_value
An integer value in the range 1124.
admitted_fractional_
rate
An integer value, indicating in Kbit/s the threshold value of the admitted

bandwidth on the interface; it is used for triggering PAUSE frames generation.
admitted_mc_rate
An integer value, indicating the threshold value of the admitted bandwidth (in
Kbps) on the interface for multicast traffic.
admitted_unkn_rate
Kbps) on the interface for unknown traffic.
bridge_forward_delay
The Bridge Forward Delay used by STP to transition Root and Designated Ports
to Forwarding; an integer value, measured in 0.01 seconds, in the range 400
-3000, with a default value of 1500.
bridge_hello_time
The interval between periodic transmissions of Configuration Message by

Designated Ports; an integer value, measured in 0.01 seconds, in the range
100200, with a default value of 200.
bridge_max_age
The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the
Root Bridge; an integer value, measured in 0.01 seconds, in the range 6004000,
with a default value of 2000.
bridge_pri
Writable portion of the bridge identifier (the first 2 byte of 8 byte); an integer
value in the range [061440] with granularity 4096 and a default value of 32768.
bridge_tx_hold_count
An integer number, in the range [010].
cbs_value
An integer number, in the range [064 MB] with 1 byte granularity.
cir_value
An integer number, in the range [3 kbit/s - port line rate] with 1 kbit/s granularity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
1-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index
Definition
classifier_id
An integer number, indicating the specific ETS InFlow classifier.
ctrl_frame_32bits
It identifies the control frame types for pass through or discard and has the
following syntax:
PRELIMINARY
CLI command indexes
Introduction
[customerbpdu][providerbpdu][slowprot][802.1x][providergvrp][customer
Inside the MIB, this information is mapped in a 32-bit string, with 0 being most
significant bit. Each bit in this string indicates if the frame-type represented by
this bit is discarded (bit=0) or passed (bit=1). Data frames are always passed.
Bit mapping is defined in Table 1-2, Bit mapping (p. 1-22).
dscp
An integer value in the set [063], indicating the DSCP value, or the lower
boundary of a DSCP range.
dscp_set
An expression using integer values in the range [063], and specific symbols for
representing set of DSCP value ranges which are associated to a dropping
precedence value (green, yellow, red) in that color profile.
For instance, 12-15&55 means that the DSCP values 12, 13, 14, 15 and 55 are
associated to "green" in that color profile.
An integer number, in the range [0-min [64MB, 256 * corresponding_CBS]] with
1 byte granularity.
eir_value
An integer number, port line rate with 1 kbit/s granularity.
elr_value
The effective line rate expressed in Kb/s.
eqpt_type
Identifies the type of the equipment.
ethertype_value
A string composed of four hexadecimal characters.
ethertype_bitmask
A string of four hexadecimal characters, specifying the network bit mask.
extpointin_naming
An integer number in the range 18, indicating the specific Housekeeping Input.
extpointout_naming
An integer number in the range 14, indicating the specific Housekeeping

Output.
eventtype_id
An integer number, indicating the specific event type (within the allowed set) to
be associated to an output external point working in automatic mode.
eventtype_name
A string equal to the specific event type string (within the allowed set) to be
associated to an output external point working in automatic mode.
filterDbAgeTime_
value
a value in the set [10s, 300sec (default), 70min, 210min, 14h, 56h] indicating the
filtering database aging time.
floodinglimit_value
The ingress port admitted flooding rate expressed in kbit/s
green_lower_thr_
value
The percentage (0100) that is utilized of the buffer, after which the drop
probability of Green packets rises above 0. The default value is 70.
green_max_prob_value
The drop probability (0100) of Green packets.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-15
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
ebs_value
PRELIMINARY
CLI command indexes
Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index
Definition
green_upper_thr_
value
The percentage utilized (0100) of the buffer, after which the drop probability of
Green packets is 100 percent. This means that all Green packets beyond this point
will be dropped. The default value is 90.
group_membership_
interval
An integer value, measured in seconds, with a default value of 260.
hash_mask_id
Allowed combinations of Hashing key parameters, as input to Link Aggregation

Hash function:
0 (Default) Mask0 <MAC Destination Address(DA), MAC Source

Address(SA)>
1 Mask1 Bits 0,1 set to 1 value, any other bits set to 0 value - <MAC
(DA), MAC (SA)> + up to 3 MPLS Labels
2 Mask2 Bits 0,1,2,4,6 set to 1 value, any other bits set to 0 value [<MAC (DA), MAC (SA)> + up to 3 MPLS Labels] + <Inner VID, outer
VID>
3 Mask3 Bits 0,1,2,4,6,8,9 set to 1 value, any other bits set to 0 value [<MAC (DA), MAC (SA)> + up to 3 MPLS Labels + <Inner VID, outer
VID>] + <IP source Address, IP Destination Address>
4 Mask4 Bits 0,1,2,4,6,8,9,10,11 to 1 value, any other bits set to 0 value [<MAC (DA), MAC (SA)> + up to 3 MPLS Labels + <Inner VID, outer
VID>] + <IP source Address, IP Destination Address> +<Destination Port
umber, Source Port umber>
Each combination is represented by a single bit within this object. Only the first
13 bits are defined (bits 0 to 12), the remaining bits (bits 13 to 31) have not been
defined yet. Refer to Table 1-3, Bit mapping definitions (p. 1-23).
PRELIMINARY
hh:mm:ss
Hours, minutes, and seconds, in the format:
Hour (hh), an integer value in the range 023
Minute (mm), an integer value in the range 059
Seconds (ss), an integer value in the range 059
ipAddr
An IP address in string decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n
ipAddrBitMask
An IP address netmask in decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n
lagnumber
The following syntax is used for naming a LAG to which a CLI command
applies: lagnumber, where number is an integer in the range 124. For example,
lag18.
lagnumber_set
An expression using integer values, ampersand (&) and hyphen (-). For example,
lag4-7&18.
lagsize_value
An integer value, in the range 116.
last_member_query_
count
An integer value, in the range 1255, with a default value of 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
1-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Definition
last_member_query_
interval
An integer value, measured in 0.1 seconds, in the range 1255, with a default
value of 10 (1 second).
linkoam_max_
symbolerrors
An integer value indicating the threshold value for the number of Symbol Errors
in one second that trigger the Link Fail flag in OAMPDUs.
linkoam_threshold
An integer value with the number of frame errors that must occur for this event to
be triggered.
linkoam_tx_interval
An integer value in terms of 10 ms between 2 consecutive Information

OAMPDUs.
ma_userlabel
An Octet String as Maintenance Association identifier. The combined length of

MD and MA user labels cannot exceed 48 bytes.
macAddr
A MAC Address in string hex colon-separated format: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
macBitMask
A MAC Address bit mask in string hex colon-separated format:

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (for example, FF:FF:E0:00:00:00)
maxEthertype_value
Same syntax of ethertype_value. It indicates the upper boundary of an

EtherType range.
maxdscp
Same syntax of dscp. It indicates the upper boundary of a DSCP range.
maxpri
Same syntax of pri. It indicates the upper boundary of a PRI range.
max_response_time
An integer value, measured in 0.1 seconds, in the range 1255, with a default
value of 100.
maxvci_id
The same syntax as vci_id. It indicates the upper boundary of a ATM VCI
range.
maxvlan_id
The same syntax as vlan_id. It indicates the upper boundary of a VLA ID

range.
maxvpi_id
The same syntax as vpi_id. It indicates the upper boundary of an ATM VPI
range.
md_userlabel
An Octet String Integer identifying a Maintenance Domain. The combined length

of MD and MA user labels cannot exceed 48 bytes.
md_level
An integer in the range 07, identifying the Maintenance Domain Level.
mep_set
An expression, using integer values in the range 18191, and specific symbols,
for representing a set of MEPID ranges. For instance 13&21 means that the
values 1,2,3,21 are specified
mstp_instance
The MSTP instance identifier. An integer value in the range of 164, used for
both vStpMstVlanAssignmentMsti umber and vStpMstInstance umber.
mstp_instance_set
An expression using integer values in the range 16, and specific symbols for
representing a set of MSTP instance value ranges. For instance 13&21 means
that the values 1, 2, 3 and 21 are specified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-17
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Index
PRELIMINARY
CLI command indexes
Introduction
PRELIMINARY
CLI command indexes
Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index
Definition
mtu_value
An integer value, indicating the MTU/MRU in byte. MTU/MRU allowed and

default values are listed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch
(TSS-320 and TSS-160), Release 3.1 User Provisioning Guide.
naming
The following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command
applies:
rRsrSslBdDpP , where:
naming_set
R (Rack) = 17
S (Subrack) = 0 or 17
B (Board) = 0 or 143
D (Drawer) = 0 or 17
P (Port) = 0 or 11023
An expression using integer values in the range 14094, ampersand (&) and
hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges. For example, the
following expression means that the ports 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 of the boards in slots 4,
5, 6, 7 and 18 are specified:
r1sr1sl47&18d0p15
naming_set_list
A list of naming set as naming_set#1[,naming_set#2 ,naming_set#n]

is an expression using integer values in the range 14094, ampersand (&) and
hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges.
For example:
r1sr1sl36&18d0p13
means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18
r1sr1sl79&19d0p46
means that the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19 are specified.
r1sr1sl3d0p1,r1sr1sl5d0p2
PRELIMINARY
means that the port 1 of the board in slot 3 and the port 2 of the board in slot 5 are
specified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
1-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index
Definition
naming_set_list_
lagnumber_set_AND_
Rule
An expression using naming_set_list_lagnumber_set (for port, LAG) and VPLS

Rule separated with /. For example, r1sr1sl36&18d1p1-3/VPLS
U I,lag47&18.
For example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
PRELIMINARY
CLI command indexes
Introduction

r1sr1sl79&19d0p46
means that the port 1 of the board in slot 3 and the port 2 of the board in slot 5 are
specified.
neighbor_router_
timeout
ne_pri
An integer value, in the range 065535, indicating the priority value associated
with the Actor's E.
pir_value
An integer number, in the range 0 - port line rate, in 1 kbit/s increments.
pkgversion
It is a value in the form xx.xx.xx (for example, 02.11.00) where:
the first field represents the Major version
the second field represents the Minor version
the third field represents the Maintenance version
port_lnkaggpri
Link Aggregation port priority (2 byte). An integer value in the range 0255, with
default a value of 128.
port_path_cost
The port path cost. Its value depends on the link speed of the port. For example,
if the link speed of the port is Mb/s, port_path_cost= an integer value in the
range 1200000000, with a default value of 20,000,000.
port_pri
Writable portion of the port identifier (the first 4 bit of 2 byte). An integer value
in the range 0240, in increments of 16, with a default value of 128.
portseg_id
An integer value indicating Port Segregation identifier with:
portseg_set
A default value equal to 1
Value in the range of 115.
A default value equal to 1
An expression using integer values in the range 115, and specific symbols
for representing a set of Port Segregation. For instance 12&12 means that
the Port Segregation values 1,2,12, are specified.
An integer value, in Kbps, indicating the shaping rate for an egress port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-19
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
port_shaping_rate
PRELIMINARY
CLI command indexes
Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index
Definition
pri
An integer value in the range 07, indicating the Priority or the lower boundary
of a PRI range.
pri_set
An expression using integer values 07 to identify priorities, and characters g, y,

and r to specify green, yellow, or red for each priority. The format is:
03:abcd,47:efgh
Where: a, b, c, d, e, f, g, and h must be one of the characters g, y, or r, to specify
the color green, yellow, or red.
PRELIMINARY
For instance, 03:gggy,4-7:yrrr means that priority 0, 1, and 2 are set to

green, priority 3 and 4 are set to yellow, and priority 5, 6, and 7 are set to red.
priyellow
An integer value in the range 07, indicating the Priority of the yellow frames.
pw_id
An integer value indicating the MPLS PW Index.
pw_set
An expression using PW Set. For example pwr1sr1sl36&18p13.
pw_set_AND_Rule
An expression using PW Set and VPLS Rule separated with /. For example,
pwr1sr1sl36&18d1p13/VPLS Core PW.
queue_number
An integer value in the range 07, specifying the queue identifier.
ratelimited_value
The maximum allowed rate, measured in Kbit/s, configured on GFP/LAPS ports.
region_userlabel
An octet string representing the name of an MSTP region
region_revision_
level
The MSTP region revision level. An integer value in the range of 065535.
reporting_interval
router_timeout
tca_lower_value
An integer value in terms of percentage (0100), indicating the lower Filtering

Database threshold value for Filtering entries in on a per-VLA basis. The
default Value is 70.
tca_upper_value
An integer value in terms of percentage (0100), indicating the upper Filtering

Database threshold value for Filtering entries in on a per-VLA basis. The
default Value is 80.
thresholdprofile_
userlabel
An octet string used as a reference for PM threshold Data.
transportPortNumber
An integer number.
ttl_value
An integer value in the range 0255, indicating LTM TTL field for Link Trace
Manager. The default value is 64.
tunnel_egress_ler
An IP Address for the egress LSR associated with an MPLS Tunnel Instance.
tunnel_id
An integer value identifying a set of tunnel instances.
tunnel_ingress_ler
An IP Address for the ingress LSR associated with an MPLS Tunnel Instance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
1-20
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index
Definition
tunnel_instance
An integer value identifying a particular instance of a tunnel between a pair of

ingress and egress LSRs.
user_login
Login name string. Valid values for user login are 5 to 12, case-sensitive
alphanumeric characters where the first character must always be an alphabetic
character. The following special characters are also accepted as valid characters
and will be part of the user login: % (percent sign), + (plus sign), # (pound sign),
and _ (under score). Example.: "David", "Admin_005", "eqptAdmin".
vci_id
An integer value in the range 065535, indicating the ATM VCI, or the lower
boundary of a ATM VCI range.
vlan_bitmask
A bit-mask for an integer value in the set range 04094.
vlan_id
An integer value in the set 14094, indicating the VID or the lower boundary of a
VLA ID range.
vlan_set
An expression using integer values in the range 14094 and specific symbols for
representing a set of VLA value ranges.
PRELIMINARY
CLI command indexes
Introduction
For instance 100103&2555 means that the VLA values 100, 101, 102, 103 and
2555 are specified.
An integer value in the range 04095, indicating the ATM VPI, or the lower
boundary of a ATM VPI range.
vplsDb_value
A value indicating the maximum number of unicast dynamic filtering entries that
can be learned for a VPLS Instance FilteringDatabase.
vpls_userlabel
An octet string (encoded into 8 bytes) as a unique VPLS Instance identifier, for
example: 100:10.
vt_cir_rate
The committed rate in kbit/sec associated to a specific VT.
vtid
An integer value in the range 140956, indicating the Service-aware VT

identifier
vt_set
An expression using integer values, in the range 140956, and specific symbols
for representing a set of Service-aware VT identifier value ranges. For
instance, 13&21 means that the values 1,2,3,21 are specified.
vt_userlabel
An octet string used as Virtual Transport identifier.
vt_shaping_rate
An integer value, indicating in Kbps the shaping rate for a Virtual Transport.
vtq_cir_rate
The committed rate in kbit/sec. of egress Virtual Transport Queue.
vtq_cqs
The committed queue size in bytes. The default value is 0.
vtq_eqs
The excessive queue size in bytes. The default value is 0.
vtq_shaping_rate
The egress Virtual Transport Queue shaping rate in kbit/sec.
wred_userlabel
An Octet string indicating the WRED profile identifier.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-21
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
vpi_id
PRELIMINARY
CLI command indexes
Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index
Definition
xpri_set
An expression based on the following template "0-3:abcd,4-7:efgh" where: a, b,

c, d, e ,f ,g ,h character must be one of g)reen, y)ellow and r)ed; a is color of
priority 0, b is color of priority 1, ..., h is color of priority 7. ex.: 0-3:gggy,4-7:yrrr
means priority0: green, priority1: green, priority2: green, priority3: yellow,
priority4: yellow, priority5: red, priority6: red, priority7: red.
yellow_lower_thr_
value
Yellow packets rises above 0. The default value is 50.
yellow_max_prob_
value
The drop probability (0100) of Yellow packets . The default value is 80.
yellow_upper_thr_
value
Green packets is 100 percent. This means that all Yellow packets beyond this
point will be dropped. The default value is 60.
yy:mm:dd
Year, month, and day, expressed as:
Year (yy), an integer value in the range 199.
Month (mm), an integer value in the range 112.
Day (dd), an integer value in the range 131.
User-defined indexes
PRELIMINARY
The following indexes (xxx_userlabel) are ASCII strings defined by the Operator to
indicate specific resources inside CLI commands:
acl_userlabel
alarmprofile_userlabel
extpoint_userlabel
lag_userlabel
vlanprof_userlabel
asap_userlabel
colorprof_userlabel
flow_userlabel
flowgroup_userlabel
ne_userlabel
trafficdescriptor_userlabel
vlanprotprof_userlabel
Table 1-2
Bit mapping
Protocol Description
MAC Address
Bit
Data Frames
--
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
1-22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-2
Bit mapping
(continued)
Protocol Description
MAC Address
Bit
Customer BPDU (STP, RSTP, MSTP)
01-80-C2-00-00-00
Provider BPDU (STP, RSTP, MSTP)
01-80-C2-00-00-08
Slow Protocols
01-80-C2-00-00-02
802.1X PAE
01-80-C2-00-00-03
Reserved for future MAC applications
01-80-C2-00-00-04
Reserved for future MAC applications
01-80-C2-00-00-05
Reserved for future bridge applications
01-80-C2-00-00-06
01-80-C2-00-00-07
01-80-C2-00-00-09
01-80-C2-00-00-0A
10
Reserved for future Provider bridge

operations
01-80-C2-00-00-0B
11
Reserved for future Provider bridge

operations
01-80-C2-00-00-0C
12
Provider GVRP
01-80-C2-00-00-0D
13
Reserved for future Customer bridge

operations
01-80-C2-00-00-0E
14
Reserved for future Customer bridge

operations
01-80-C2-00-00-0F
15
Bridge Management
01-80-C2-00-00-10
16
Customer GMRP
01-80-C2-00-00-20
17
Customer GARP
01-80-C2-00-00-21
18
Reserved for future GARP applications
01-80-C2-00-00-22 to01-80-C2-00-00-2F
19 to 32
Table 1-3
PRELIMINARY
CLI command indexes
Introduction

Bit
MAC Destination Address
MAC Source Address
C-VID
C-PRI
S-VID
S-PRI
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-23
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Hashing key parameter
PRELIMINARY
CLI command indexes
Introduction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-3
(continued)
Hashing key parameter
Bit
All MPLS Labels
Lowest MPLS Label (MPLS label with 1 bottom-of-stack bit)
IP Destination Address
IP Source Address
Destination Port umber
10
Source Port umber
11
IP DSCP
12
Table 1-4
PRELIMINARY
Alarm and cause relationship
Alarm
pcause
Card Fail
rup
Card Mismatch
rutm
Card Out
rum
Unconfigured Equipment
uep
OR Battery Failure
batteryfail
Fuse Broken
fusebroken
SLC Unreachable
icp
LDC Unreachable
icp
LA Alarm
lanfailure
Software Mismatch
versionmismatch
Excessive Environmental Temperature
excessiveenvironmentaltemperature
Link Failure
receiverfailure
Housekeeping not available
housekeepingalarm
PLM
plm
TSF
tsf
TSD / DEG
sdhconcdegrade
LOS
los
LOF
lof
CSF
csf
EXM
extensionheadermismatch
UPM
userpayloadmismatch
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
1-24
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1-4
Alarm and cause relationship
(continued)
Alarm
pcause
URU
uru
UAT
uat
TCA
tca
PRELIMINARY
CLI command indexes
Introduction
CLI command definition

Conventions and requirements
The following conventions are used in CLI command definitions.

1. Several commands require that the operator define a user label. The node must assure
that user labels for a specified resource are unambiguous.
2. Operator can define user labels containing spaces or / characters. In these cases, the
string must be in quotation marks (for example, ext point in 2 user label "physical
LOS housekeeping").
3. Use the following guidelines for entering integer parameter values:
Integer parameter values are assumed to be positive. The plus sign (+) is not
needed and not a valid entry character with an integer value.
egative integer values are identified with the minus sign (-)
A decimal point (.) is not required or valid anywhere in an integer parameter value
Zero (0) is an accepted integer parameter value, by itself. However, leading zeros
are not valid with other integers.
The following integer values are valid: 0, 5, 100, -5, -100
The following integer values are not valid: +0, 0., +5, 05, 100.5.
4. The ASAP configuration commands require operator to enter the ASAP user label
instead of the ASAP index, for simplicity sake.
5. In some commands, the bridge port is referenced by the bridge port number.
6. When an optional value in a command is not provided by the operator, the
corresponding currently configured value remains unchanged (if no value had been
previously configured the default value applies). In the commands where a different
behavior is applied, it is explicitly stated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
1-25
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
7. If only one resource is involved, then CLI command is atomic (that is, if any
command parameter setting fails, the entire command is rejected). If two or more
resources are involved, then it is possible that some resources will be modified
successfully and some resources will not be modified because a setting fails.
8. For commands which set parameters that are modifiable only when a certain resource
is administratively disabled, it is required to check if this condition is satisfied and, if
not, to reject the command advising properly the operator.
PRELIMINARY
Introduction
CLI command definition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9. If a CLI command fails, the error code currently defined for the corresponding
management function failure has to be reported to the operator.
10. Any parameter that is retrievable by a show command but that is not significant in a
specific scenario in which the command has been applied, is neglected in the show
report.
11. By default, the output for all commands is presented one screen at a time. This can be
disabled, using the command, administrator config confirm disable or
session config confirm disable.
The administrator group commands configure/show default options until next CLI
reboot. Configurations are not stored on hard disk but are the default for current
session and all next sessions, options until next CLI reboot. Administrator commands
can be used only by users with PROV security privileges.
The session group commands configure/show options for the current CLI session
only. Session commands can be used by all users.
12. Some commands requires a confirmation for allowing operator an after-editing
verification.
13. CLI is allowed to perform 'set' operations only if it has granted local access control.
There is one exception: the set operation for requesting the access control itself.
PRELIMINARY
14. When the E is able to support both "condition" and "change" management function
of a certain parameter, the command, defined in this document for setting that
parameter, refers always to the "change" management function. This policy has to be
applied independent of which of the two management function ("change" or
"condition") is referred in the command reference section.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
1-26
PRELIMINARY
2quipment management
E
commands
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to equipment management.

Contents
2-2
2-5
2-6
2-6
eqpt position naming_set_list show allowedeqpt
2-7
eqpt position naming_set_list show info
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-14
eqpt show nename
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-18
2-19
extpoint show in
2-20
extpoint out extpointout_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel
2-21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
2-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
extpoint out extpointout_naming criteria {manual | remote | auto

{eventtype_id | eventtype_name}}
2-22
extpoint show out
2-23
extpoint show outeventslist
2-24

Description
This command configures the equipment expected in an equipment position slot.

The equipment type must be included in the list of the allowed equipment types for that
equipment position.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160 supported items for each equipment
position are listed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and
TSS-160), Release 3.1 Product Information Planning Guide.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list
A list of naming set as naming_set#1 [,naming_set#2,naming_set#n] is an

expression using integer values in the range 14094, ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for
representing board, drawer or port value ranges. For example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
eqpt_type
Identifies the type of the equipment item. Acceptable equipment types are listed in the
Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and TSS-160), Release 3.1
Product Information Planning Guide.
PRELIMINARY
Example
In the following example the eqpt position command is entered, then the
eqpt show allpositions command is entered to show the equipment configuration.
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt position r1sr1sl14 type PP20G
>> error: denied command for SwPackage profile
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
2-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
2-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
CLI:ADMIN > eqpt show allpositions

Position
expected eqpt type actual eqpt type equipment status
---------------- -------------------- ------------------ ---------------r1
RACK
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1
S320
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl1
EC320
EC320
inService (1)
r1sr1sl2
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl3
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl4
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl5
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl3
PP20G
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl3d0
PIM10GE
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl3d0p101 10GB
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl4d0
PIM1GE
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl4d0p101 EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl4d0p102 1000B
EMPTY
inService (1)
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl4d0p106 1000B
EMPTY
inService (1)
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl7
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl8
PP20G
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl8d1
PIMMS
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl8d2
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl9
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl10
MT320
MT320
inService (1)
r1sr1sl11
MT320
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl12
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl13
UNKNOWN
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl13d1
UNKNOWN
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl13d2
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
1.1.13.3.0
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
1.1.13.4.0
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
1.1.13.5.0
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
1.1.13.6.0
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
1.1.13.7.0
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
1.1.13.4.0
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl13
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl14
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl15
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl16
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl17
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (0)
r1sr1sl18
PP10G
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl18d1
PIM1GE
EMPTY
inService (1)
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
r1sr1sl18d1p1 EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl18d1p2 EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl18d1p3 SS-162C-1530
EMPTY
r1sr1sl18d1p4 EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl18d1p5 EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl18d1p6 1000B
EMPTY
r1sr1sl18d1p7 EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl18d1p8 EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl18d1p9 EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl18d2
PIMMS
EMPTY
r1sr1sl19
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl20
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl21
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl22
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl23
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl24
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl25
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl26
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl27
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl28
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl29
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl30
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl31
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl32
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl33
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl34
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl35
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl36
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl37
POW320
POW320
r1sr1sl38
EMPTY
EMPTY
r1sr1sl39
POW320
EMPTY
r1sr1sl40
FAN320
FAN320
r1sr1sl41
FAN320
FAN320
r1sr1sl42
TBUS320
TBUS320
r1sr1sl43
TBUS320
TBUS320
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
inService (1)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
inService (1)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
inService (1)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
outOfService (0)
inService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
PRELIMINARY
CLI:ADMIN >
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
2-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves the following information about an equipment position:
The expected equipment type (acronym or empty)
The actual equipment type (acronym or empty)

The administrative state
The associated ASAP index and user label
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
In the following example are shown three outputs:
First, a board type is shown (slot 6)

Second, a drawer type is shown (drawers 1 and 2 of previous board)
Third, a port type is shown (interface 1 of previous drawers)

Cli:ADMIN > eqpt position r1sr1sl6 show type
1.1.6.0.0 - expected eqpt type: pp20G
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt position r1sr1sl6d1-2 show type
1.1.6.1.0 - expected eqpt type: PIM10GE
1.1.6.2.0 - expected eqpt type: PM1GE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
2-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt position r1sr1sl6d1-2p1 show type

1.1.6.1.1 - expected eqpt type: 10GB
1.1.6.2.1 - expected eqpt type: EMPTY
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command allow you to set the ASAP associated to an equipment position.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
asap_userlabel
An ASCII string defined by the operator.

Example
The following example shows the command for a specific board (slot 6).
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt position r1sr1sl6 asap "no alarm"

Description
This commands retrieves all ASAP that can be assigned to position naming_set_list.
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
2-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following shows an example of Alarm Severity Profile for slot 3:

Cli:ADMIN > eqpt position r1sr1sl3 show asap
LabelKey
Alarm Severity Profile UserLabel
------------ -------------------------------@1
'no-alarm'
@2
'primary-alarms'
@3
'path-alarms'
@4
'all-alarms'
PRELIMINARY
Status
------------active (1)
active (1)
active (1)
active (1)

Description
This command retrieves the allowed equipment types for an equipment position.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example shows the allowed equipment types available for a specific
position (slot 6):
r1sr1sl6
r1sr1sl6
r1sr1sl6
r1sr1sl6
allowed
allowed
allowed
allowed
equipment
equipment
equipment
equipment
Type:
Type:
Type:
Type:
EMPTY
PP20G
CMDX8S
CMDX2S-1470/1490
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
2-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt position r1sr1sl6 show allowedeqpt
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
r1sr1sl6 - allowed equipment Type: CMDX2S-1510/1530

r1sr1sl6 - allowed equipment Type: CMDX1S
r1sr1sl6 - allowed equipment Type: CMDX8
r1sr1sl6 - allowed equipment Type: CADM4S-1470/1490/1510/1530
r1sr1sl6 - allowed equipment Type: CADM4S-1550/1570/1590/1610
r1sr1sl6 - allowed equipment Type: CADM2S-1470/1490
r1sr1sl6 - allowed equipment Type: CADM1S-1470
r1sr1sl6 - allowed equipment Type: CADM1S-1490r1sr1sl6 - allowed
equipment Type: CADM1S-1610r1sr1sl6 - allowed equipment Type:
CADM4-1470/1490/1510/1530
r1sr1sl6 - allowed equipment Type: CADM4-1550/1570/1590/1610
r1sr1sl6 - allowed equipment Type: CADM2-1470/1490
r1sr1sl6 - allowed equipment Type: CADM1-1470
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN >
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
2-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves the following information about an equipment position:
the expected equipment type
the actual equipment type (empty or acronym)

the equipment status (administrative state: in service, out of service, ...)
the associated ASAP Index

the associated ASAP User label
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example shows all information about a specific board (slot 6):
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt position r1sr1sl6 show info
Show Equipment Info r1sr1sl6
------------------------------expected eqpt type Id: 325
expected eqpt type: PP10G
actual eqpt type: EMPTY
equipment status: inService (1)
Asap Index: 2
Alarm Severity Profile UserLabel: 'primary alarms'
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
2-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves the Remote Inventory (RI) data of an item in an equipment
position.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
In the following example, the fields relevant to the RI information (Status, Mnemonic,
CLEI code, P/, etc.) for a specific equipped board (slot 6) are displayed:
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt position r1sr1sl6 show ri
PRELIMINARY
Show Remote Inventory Info r1sr1sl6

------------------------------------remote Inventory Status: available (1)
remote Inventory Company Id:
remote Inventory Mnemonic:
remote Inventory CLEI Code:
remote Inventory Part Number:
remote Inventory Software Part Number:
remote Inventory Factory Id:
remote Inventory Serial Number:
remote Inventory date Id:
remote Inventory date:
remote Inventory Customer Field:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
2-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command resets an item in a specific equipment position.

Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
naming
The following syntax is used for naming a resource to which a CLI command applies:
rRsrSslBdDpP, where:
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0, 17
Board
0, 143
Drawer
0, 17
Port
0, 11023
ote: When a certain field is meaningless for naming a resource, this field is omitted
in the naming.
ote: For commands that apply to a board, naming must have rack, subrack, and
board. For commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack,
board, drawer=0, and port.
Example
The following example illustrates a command that is relevant to a specific board in slot 6:
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt position r1sr1sl6 reset
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
2-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves the expected equipment type for all slot positions (boards,
drawers and ports).
This command has the same objective of command eqpt position naming_set_list
show type (p. 2-5), but applied to all E slot positions (for practical use).
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows the information about all the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320
and TSS-160 equipment slot positions, specifically:
position (referred to board or drawer or port)
expected equipment type mnemonic (acronym, unknown or empty)

actual equipment type (acronym or empty)
equipment status (administrative state: in service, out of service, ...).

Cli:ADMIN > eqpt show allpositions
PRELIMINARY
Position
expected
actual
equipment status
eqpt type eqpt type
-------------------- ------------ ----------- ---------------r1
RACK
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1
S320
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl1
EC320
EC320
inService (1)
r1sr1sl2
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
r1sr1sl3
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
r1sr1sl4
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
r1sr1sl5
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
r1sr1sl6
PIM20G
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl6d1
PIM10GE
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl6d1p1
10GB
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl6d2
PIM1GE
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl6d2p1
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
r1sr1sl6d2p2
1000B
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl6d2p3
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
r1sr1sl6d2p4
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
r1sr1sl6d2p5
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
r1sr1sl6d2p6
1000B
EMPTY
inService (1)
r1sr1sl6d2p7
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
r1sr1sl6d2p8
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
r1sr1sl6d2p9
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
r1sr1sl6d2p10
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
2-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EMPTY
PP20G
PIMMS
EMPTY
EMPTY
MT320
MT320
EMPTY
UNKNOWN
UNKNOWN
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
MT320
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
outOfService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
r1sr1sl18
r1sr1sl18d1
r1sr1sl18d1p1
r1sr1sl18d1p2
r1sr1sl18d1p3
r1sr1sl18d1p4
r1sr1sl18d1p5
r1sr1sl18d1p6
r1sr1sl18d1p7
r1sr1sl18d1p8
r1sr1sl18d1p9
r1sr1sl18d1p10
r1sr1sl18d2
r1sr1sl19
r1sr1sl20
r1sr1sl21
r1sr1sl22
r1sr1sl23
r1sr1sl24
r1sr1sl25
r1sr1sl26
r1sr1sl27
r1sr1sl28
r1sr1sl29
r1sr1sl30
r1sr1sl31
r1sr1sl32
PP20G
EMPTY
inService (1)
PIM1GE
EMPTY
inService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
SS-162C-1530 EMPTY
inService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
1000B
EMPTY
inService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
PIMMS
EMPTY
inService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
EMPTY
EMPTY
outOfService (1)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
2-13
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
r1sr1sl7
r1sr1sl8
r1sr1sl8d1
r1sr1sl8d2
r1sr1sl9
r1sr1sl10
r1sr1sl11
r1sr1sl12
r1sr1sl13
r1sr1sl13d1
r1sr1sl13d2
1.1.13.3.0
1.1.13.4.0
1.1.13.5.0
1.1.13.6.0
1.1.13.7.0
r1sr1sl13
r1sr1sl14
r1sr1sl15
r1sr1sl16
r1sr1sl17
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
r1sr1sl33
r1sr1sl34
r1sr1sl35
r1sr1sl36
r1sr1sl37
r1sr1sl38
r1sr1sl39
r1sr1sl40
r1sr1sl41
r1sr1sl42
r1sr1sl43
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
POW320
EMPTY
POW320
FAN320
FAN320
TBUS320
TBUS320
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
FAN320
FAN320
TBUS320
TBUS320
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
outOfService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
inService (1)
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
This command retrieves the status of the backplane links from the Matrix (main and spare
MT320 units) to the ports and vice versa.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows the Rx/Tx status between a single port at the
board/drawer/port level, and the active MT320 unit (without ports into the shelf):
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt show linkstatus

Index
rx Link Status
tx Link Status
-------------------- ------------------------- ----------------r1
r1sr1
r1sr1sl1
r1sr1sl2
r1sr1sl3
r1sr1sl4
r1sr1sl5
r1sr1sl6
r1sr1sl6d1
r1sr1sl6d1p1
r1sr1sl6d2
r1sr1sl6d2p1
r1sr1sl6d2p2
r1sr1sl6d2p3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
2-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
r1sr1sl6d2p4
r1sr1sl6d2p5
r1sr1sl6d2p6
r1sr1sl6d2p7
r1sr1sl6d2p8
r1sr1sl6d2p9
r1sr1sl6d2p10
r1sr1sl7
r1sr1sl8
r1sr1sl8d1
r1sr1sl8d2
r1sr1sl9
r1sr1sl10
r1sr1sl11
r1sr1sl12
r1sr1sl13
r1sr1sl13d1
r1sr1sl13d2
1.1.14.3.0
1.1.14.4.0
1.1.14.5.0
1.1.14.6.0
1.1.14.7.0
r1sr1sl13
r1sr1sl14
PRELIMINARY
eqpt show nename

Description
This command retrieves the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160 etwork
Element name.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt show nename

NE Name: ne1850tss-320%3.1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
2-15
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
The following example shows the information regarding the Alcatel-Lucent 1850
TSS-320 and TSS-160 equipment name and associated equipment release.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command initiates/terminates a manual switch operation (either to main or spare

protection unit).
This command is allowed if the equipment position, from and to which the switch is
performed, belong to the same EPS group.
Syntax definitions
naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0, 17
Board
0, 143
Drawer
0, 17
Port
0, 11023
in the naming. For Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160, drawer is not
supported and the value must always be 0.
Example
The following example shows a command relevant to a switch between matrices (MT320
units):
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt prot manualswitch from r1sr1sl10 to r1sr1sl11
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
2-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves information about a protection unit of a protection group.

Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0, 17
Board
0, 143
Drawer
0, 17
Port
0, 11023
in the naming. For Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160, drawer is not
supported and the value must always be 0.
Example
The following two examples show EPS protection:
The first is relevant to the Matrix unit (MT320, position 10);
The second is relevant to the Equipment Controller unit (EC320, position 1). This
feature is OT available in the current release.
Cli:ADMIN > eqpt pro show unit r1sr1sl10
Cli:ADMIN> eqpt prot show unit r1sr1sl1

Show Protection Unit Info - EC320 #1
--------------------------------------...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
2-17
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Show Protection Unit Info - MT320 #10

--------------------------------------Protection Unit Type
: main (1)
Protection switch Command : noRequest (1)
Protection switch Criteria: equipmentFailure (2)
Protection switch Status : active (1)
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Protection
Protection
Protection
Protection
Unit Type
: -----switch Command : -----switch Criteria : -----switch Status : ------

Description
This command configures the ASAP associated to an External Point Input.

Syntax definitions
extpointin_naming
extpoint_userlabel

Example
The following example shows information for a specific Housekeeping Input (Input 1).
Cli:ADMIN > extpoint in 1 userlabel RELUNOQUATTRO

Description
This command configures the ASAP associated to an External Point Input.

Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
extpointin_naming
asap_userlabel
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
2-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
Cli:ADMIN > extpoint in 1 asap "all alarms"
PRELIMINARY

Description
This command retrieves the user label and ASAP (index and user label) information
associated with a specific External Point Input.
Syntax definitions
extpointin_naming
Example
Cli:ADMIN > extpoint in 3 show asap
Show Housekeeping input Info .3
---------------------------------external input point UserLabel: 'CPI3'
external input point Asap Index: 2
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
2-19
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
extpoint show in
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
extpoint show in
Description
This command retrieves the user label and ASAP (index and user label) information
associated with all External Point Inputs.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows information for all Housekeeping Input (eight inputs are
provided).
Cli:ADMIN > extpoint show in
Show external point input Info .1
----------------------------------external input point UserLabel: 'CPI1'
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
2-20
extpoint show in
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRELIMINARY

extpoint out extpointout_naming userlabel

extpoint_userlabel
Description
This command allows you to set the user label associated to an External Point Output.
When event type is specified, it must be one of the allowed event types. Otherwise, the
command is not allowed.
Syntax definitions
extpointout_naming
An integer number in the range 14, indicating the specific Housekeeping Output.
extpoint_userlabel
An ASCII string defined by the Operator.

Example
The following example illustrates a command relevant to a specific Housekeeping Output

(Output 2):
Cli:ADMIN > extpoint out 2 userlabel RELEASE14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
2-21
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
extpoint out extpointout_naming criteria {manual |

remote | auto {eventtype_id | eventtype_name}}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
extpoint out extpointout_naming criteria {manual | remote

| auto {eventtype_id | eventtype_name}}
Description
This command allows you to set:
The output criteria associated with an External Point Output

The event type that must be associated with an external point output when the
criteria is set to auto. (When the criteria is not set to auto, it must not be
associated.) The operator can provide either the identifier number or the identifier
name of the desired event as defined in the event table.
When event type is specified, it must be one of the allowed event types. Otherwise, the
command is not allowed.
Syntax definitions
extpointout_naming
An integer number in the range 14, indicating the specific Housekeeping Output.
eventtype_id
An integer number, within the allowed set, indicating the specific event type to be
associated with an external output point working in automatic mode.
eventtype_name
A string equal to the specific event type string (within the allowed set) to be associated
to an external output point working in automatic mode.
Example
The following example illustrates a command relevant to a specific Housekeeping Output

(Output 1):
Cli:ADMIN > extpoint out 1 criteria manual
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
2-22
extpoint show out
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
extpoint show out

Description
This command provides information associated with all External Point Outputs.
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
/A
Example
The following example shows information for all Housekeeping Output (four outputs are
provided).
Cli:ADMIN > extpoint show out
Show external point output Info .1
-----------------------------------external output point UserLabel: '------'
external output point Criteria: -----external output point automatic Event Id: -----external output point automatic Event: -----Show external point output Info .2
external output point Criteria: -----external output point automatic Event Id: -----external output point automatic Event: ------
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
2-23
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves a list of events (with corresponding identifiers) that can be
associated with an External Point Output when automatic management is active.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
PRELIMINARY
The following example are shows information relevant to the events for Housekeeping.
Cli:ADMIN > expoint show outeventslist
Index
external output point allowed Event
--------- ----------------------------------------------------------1000001 Card Fail in slot 1
1000002 Card Mismatch in slot 1
1000003 Card Out in slot 1
1000000 Card Fail in slot 10
1000000 Unconfigured Equipment in slot 10
1100000 Card out in slot 11
1401000 Card Fail in slot 14 in PIM 1
1401000 Card Mismatch in slot 14 in PIM 1
1401000 Card out in slot 14 in PIM 1
1401000 Unconfigured Equipment in slot 14 in PIM 1
1401060 Card Fail in slot 14 in PIM 1 Interface 6
1401060 Card Mismatch in slot 14 in PIM 1 Interface 6
1401060 Card Out in slot 14 in PIM 1 Interface 6
1401060 Unconfigured Equipment in slot 14 in PIM 1 in
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
2-24
PRELIMINARY
3thernet physical and GFP

E
management commands
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to Ethernet physical and GFP
management.
Contents
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-6
3-6
3-8
interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg {enable | disable}
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-12
interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfssfaction {none | shutdown}
3-13
3-14
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set localeth trafficstatus

{enable | disable}
3-14
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set localeth show

trafficconditioning
3-15
GFP management
3-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-23
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh rate {e1 | ds1 | e3 | ds3}
3-23
3-24
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh rxsensitivity {longhaul |

shorthaul}
3-25
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh lbo lbo_value
3-26
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh linecoding {b8zs | ami}
3-27
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh signalmode {esf | sf | cbit |

m23}
3-28
3-29
3-30
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-2

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
This section contains various commands related to general interface management.

Contents
3-3
3-4

Description
This command retrieves information about the configured interfaces:
the administrative status

interface type
the traffic port status (enabled/disabled)

the Ethernet port client layer
the traffic port enablig
the ETS Service Type and ETS Service Status
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

expression using integer values in the range 1 4094, ampersand (&) and hyphen (-)
for representing board, drawer or port value ranges. For example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
The following example shows all interfaces configured for a specific board in slot 6.
Cli:ADMIN > interface show r1sr1sl6
Port
InterfaceType ClientType AdminStatus TrafficEnabled
=============================================================
r1sr1sl6d1p1
eth (6)
ets (1)
down (2)
down (2)
r1sr1sl6d1p2
eth (6)
ets (1)
down (2)
down (2)
r1sr1sl6d1p6
eth (6)
ets (1)
down (2)
down (2)
The following example shows all interfaces configured in the equipment.

Cli:ADMIN > interface show r1sr1sl6
Port
InterfaceType ClientType AdminStatus TrafficEnabled
==============================================================
r1sr1sl6d1p1
eth (6)
ets (1)
down (2)
down (2)
r1sr1sl6d1p2
eth (6)
ets (1)
down (2)
down (2)
r1sr1sl6d1p6
eth (6)
ets (1)
down (2)
down (2)
r1sr1sl8d1p1
gfp (221)
-----down (2)
down (2)
rem eth (6)
ets (1)
down (2)
down (2)
r1sr1sl18d1p3
eth (6)
ets (1)
down (2)
down (2)
r1sr1sl18d1p6
eth (6)
ets (1)
up (1)
down (2)
r1sr1sl18d2p2
gfp (221)
-----up (1)
up (1)
rem eth (6)
ets (1)
up (1)
up (1)
r1sr1sl18d2p5
gfp (221)
-----down (2)
down (2)
rem eth (6)
etb (2)
down (2)
down (2)

Description
PRELIMINARY
This command retrieves the following information of the configured interfaces:
the administrative status

the operational status
the line rate (speed)
the traffic rate to which transmission is limited (for remote Ethernet port only)
the traffic port enabling
the ingress port admitted Flooding Rate (i.e. the threshold value of received admitted
bandwidth generating flooding traffic, on this ingress interface)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

expression using integer values in the range 1- 4094, ampersand (&) and hyphen (-)
PRELIMINARY
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example shows all configured interface information for a specified board
in slot 6.
Cli:ADMIN > interface trafficshow r1sr1sl6
Port
AdminStatus TrafficEnabled OperStatus Speed LimitedSpeed FloodingRate
=============================================================================
r1sr1sl6d1p1 down (2)
down (2) down (2) 10000000
0 10000000
down (2) down (2) 1000000
0 1000000
down (2) down (2) 1000000
0 1000000
The following example shows the information for all configured interfaces in the
equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > interface trafficshow

Port
AdminStatus TrafficEnabled OperStatus Speed LimitedSpeed FloodingRate
===========================================================================
r1sr1sl6d1p1 down (2) down (2) down (2) 10000000
0 10000000
0
1000000
0
1000000
r1sr1sl8d1p1 down (2) down (2) down (2)
0
0
0
down (2) down (2) down (2)
0
0
0
0
0
r1sr1sl18d1p6 up (1) down (2) down (2) 1000000
0
1000000
r1sr1sl18d2p2 up (1)
up (1) down (2)
149760
0
149760
up (1)
up (1) down (2)
149760
0
149760
r1sr1sl18d2p5 down (2) down (2) down (2)
0
0
0
down (2) down (2) down (2)
0
0
0
PRELIMINARY

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to Ethernet physical management.

Contents
3-6
3-8
interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg {enable | disable}
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-12
interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfssfaction {none | shutdown}
3-13
3-14
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set localeth trafficstatus

{enable | disable}
3-14
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set localeth show

trafficconditioning
3-15

Description
This command configures the default MAU type for the interface.
PRELIMINARY
ote: This command applies only to optical GE (1000BaseX-FD) and Electrical GE

interfaces.
Full command
The full command, with all available variables is displayed below:

interface position naming_set_list localeth defaulttype {10 | 100 | 1000}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
PRELIMINARY

r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example displays two commands for a specific port (interface 1 of drawer
1 of board in slot 8):
The first command is relevant to set a specific port (10ge-er type).
The second command has been entered to report all the relevant MAU information.
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl8d1p1 localeth defaulttype
10ge-er
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl8d1p1 localeth show mauinfo
Show mau Info - r1sr1sl8d1p1
-----------------------------Mau status: shutdown (5)
Mau Media Available: other (1)
Mau Jabber State: other (1)
Mau Type List Bits: 000000004000 [b10GbaseR (33)]
Mau default type: dot3MauType10GigBaseER (1.3.6.1.2.1.26.4.34)
Mau Auto Neg Supported: true (1)
Mau Ext Optical Channel Type: blackWhite (1)
Mau Ext Optical Channel Lambda: 0
Mau Ext Optical Channel spacing: 0
Mau Ext Asap Index: -----Jack Type: fiberLC (14)
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

interface position naming_set_list localeth show
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mauinfo

Description
This command retrieves general MAU information:
MAU status
operational status
jack connector type (fiber)
jabber status [other | no jabber | jabbering} (only for 10BaseT)

allowed MAU types
MAU default type
auto-negotiation support
optical channel type (B&W or Colored)
optical wavelength (lambda)

optical channel spacing
ASAP pointer
interface alarm status
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following shows an example of MAU information relevant to a specified port.
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl8d1p1 localeth show mauinfo

Show mau Info of Port r1sr1sl8d1p1
------------------------------------MauStatus: shutdown (5)
Mau Media Available: other (1)
Mau Jabber State: other (1)
Mau Type List Bits: 000000004000 [b10GbaseR (33)]
Mau default type: dot3MauType10GigBaseR (1.3.6.1.2.1.26.4.33)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-8
Mau Auto Neg Supported: true (1)

Mau Ext Optical Channel Type: blackWhite (1)
Mau Ext Optical Channel Lambda: 0
Mau Ext Optical Channel Spacing: 0
Mau Ext Asap Index: -----Jack Type: fiberLC (14)
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mauinfo
interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg

{enable | disable}
Description
This command enables or disables auto-negotiation on an interface MAU.

ote: This command does not apply to 10GE interfaces, since they do not support
auto-negotiation, or Electrical 1GE interfaces, since they support mandatory
auto-negotiation. It applies to Electrical FE and optical 1GE interfaces on which
auto-negotiation can be configured.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example shows the output for a specified port:

Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl28d0p8 localeth autoneg enable
62 - message: successful completed command !!
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Refer to the example of "interface position naming_set_list localeth show autoneg

(p. 3-11)" command to see the relevant status after the operation.
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
restart

Description
This command restarts auto-negotiation.

Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example shows the command output relevant to a specified port:
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl28d0p8 localeth autoneg
restart

advertisedcapability
Description
PRELIMINARY
This command configures the auto-negotiation capability to be advertised. For example:
the MAU type;
the PAUSE frame handling capability; each possible value corresponds to a defined
combination of capability bits from 8 to 11:
0000 for 'no pause'
1100 for 'asymmetric pause' (default value)
1111 for 'asymmetric and symmetric pause'This option is not currently available.
ote: Optical GE interfaces advertise only mau type = 1000BaseX-FD.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-10
Full command

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg advertisedcapability [10 | 100 |
1000 | 10&100 | 10&100&1000] [nopause | asympause | asym&sympause]
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example shows the command for a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of
board in slot 6):
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d1p1 localeth autoneg
.. message: successful completed command !!

Description
This command retrieves the following auto-negotiation information:

Enabled or disabled on the MAU
The current status of auto-negotiation

Auto-negotiation capabilities supported by the MAU
Auto-negotiation capabilities advertised by the MAU
Auto-negotiation capabilities advertised by the remote end

Reported capabilities are considered meaningful only after the auto-negotiation has
been completed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
autoneg
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example shows information relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of

drawer 1 of board in slot 8):
Cli: ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl8d1p1 localeth show autoneg
Show Local Ethernet AutoNeg Interface Info - r1sr1sl8d1p1
----------------------------------------------------------Mau Auto Neg Config: other (1)
Mau Auto Neg Admin Status: enabled (1)
Mau Auto Neg Capability Bits: 00C0 [bfdxPause (8)] [bfdxAPause (9)]
Mau Auto Neg CapAdvertised Bits: 0000
Mau Auto Neg CapReceived Bits: 0000
Cli:ADMIN >
interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfcsfaction

{none | shutdown}
Description
PRELIMINARY
This command configures the type of CSF action triggered by a Remote Client Fail
indication. It can be:
o action (default value)

Forced Transmitter shut-down
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-12
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

PRELIMINARY

interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfcsfaction
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
{none | shutdown}
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
To be supplied.
interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfssfaction

{none | shutdown}
Description
This command configures the type of SSF action triggered by a Remote Client Fail
indication. It can be:
o action (default value)
Forced Transmitter shut-down
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-13
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Example
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
rcfaction

Description
This command retrieves the type of CSF and SSF actions triggered by a Remote Client
Fail indication.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example shows the Remote Client Fail status for interface 1, drawer 1, slot
8.
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl8d1p1 localeth show rcfaction
R1sr1sl8d1p1 - RCF consequent action type: no action (0)
Cli:ADMIN >
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set

localeth trafficstatus {enable | disable}
Description
This command configures the current port transmit/receive state on the specified
interfaces.
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list_lagnumber_set
An expression using naming_set_list_lagnumber_set (for port, LAG) and VPLS Rule

separated with /. For example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d1p1-3/VPLS UI,lag4-7&18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-14
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
localeth trafficstatus {enable | disable}
means that the port 1 of the board in slot 3 and the port 2 of the board in slot
5 are specified.
Example
To be supplied.

localeth show trafficconditioning
Description
This command reports the following data for each given port:
the current port transmit/receive state on the interfaces

the ingress port admitted flooding rate
This command is assigned the PROV privilege.

Syntax definitions
naming_set_list
A list of naming set as naming_set#1 [naming_set#2 ,naming_set#n] is an

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-15
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
localeth show trafficconditioning
Example
The following example displays information relevant to a specific port (interface 1 of the
board in slot 6):
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d0p1 localeth show
trafficconditioning
Show Local Ethernet Interface Traffic Info of port r1sr1sl6d0p1
----------------------------------------------------------------TrafficEnabled: down (2)
FloodingRate: 10000000
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN >
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-16
GFP management
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GFP management
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
This section contains various commands related to GFP management.

Contents
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-21
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth sl {auto |

eqptnonspec}
Description
This command forces or disables the equipment-non-specific Signal Label. The E

default value is automatic (auto).
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

representing board, drawer, or port value ranges. For example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
specifies the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18
specifies the ports 4, 5, 6 of the boards in slots 7, 8, 9 and 19
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-17
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
PRELIMINARY
GFP management
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth sl {auto |
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
eqptnonspec}
Example
The command in the following example is relevant to a specific port (interface 1, drawer
2, slot 6).
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d2p1 remoteeth sl auto
CLI msg: warning: already present value r1sr1sl6d2p1

Description
This command configures the CSF transmit capability to one of the following:
disabled - o consequent action (IDLE insertion)
bidir_los - Enable the usage of GFP CSF transmit capability in bi-directional

mode, with Loss of Client Signal.
unidir_los - Enable GFP CSF transmit capability in uni-directional mode, with
Loss of Client Signal.

bidir_lof - Enable the usage of GFP CSF transmit capability in bi-directional
mode, with standard Loss of Client Character Synchronization.
unidir_lof - Enable GFP CSF transmit capability in uni-directional mode, with
standard Loss of Client Character Synchronization.

The default value for Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160 is disable.
Full command

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth csf {disable | bidir_los | unidir_los |
bidir_lof | unidir_lof}
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

PRELIMINARY
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-18
GFP management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
2, slot 6).
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d2p1 remoteeth csf bidir
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth asap

asap_userlabel
Description
This command changes the ASAP pointer associated to the mapping layer.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
asap_userlabel

Example
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl5d0p103 remoteeth asap 'all
alarms'
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-19
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
GFP management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
trafficstatus {enable | disable}
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth trafficstatus

{enable | disable}
Description
This command configures the current port transmit/receive state on the given interfaces.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
To be supplied.
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show

trafficconditioning
Description
This command retrieves the following information for a given port:
the current port transmit/receive state on the specified interfaces
the ingress port admitted flooding rate
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-20
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl5d0p103 remoteeth show
trafficconditioning
PRELIMINARY
GFP management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
trafficconditioning
Show Remote Interface Traffic Info of port r1sr1sl5d0p103

----------------------------------------------------------TrafficEnabled: ------

mappinginfo
Description
This command retrieves the following information:

The format (GFP only)
The type of GFP header as inferred by EXI field (GFP only)
The GFP interface status

The GFP interface configuration parameters
The server layer

The SDH configuration
The signal label configuration
Equipment-non-specific Signal Label sending control

The ASAP pointer
The CSF Transmit capability (GFP only)

FCS support (GFP only)
Received GFP Header client type as inferred from UPI field value (GFP only)
Presence of GFP FCS in received frames as inferred from PFI bit (GFP only)
Client Layer (for GFP)
MTU (for GFP)
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-21
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
GFP management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mappinginfo

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example shows Ethernet Mapping Interface information relevant to a

specific port (interface 1, drawer 2, slot 6):
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d2p1 remoteeth show

mappinginfo
Show Remote Ethernet Interface Info of Port r1sr1sl6d2p1
------------------------------------------------------------Admin Status: down (2)
Oper Status: down (2)
Last Change: 0 days, 0:00:00 (hr:min:sec)
interface type: gfp (221)
Speed: 0
If Rate Limited Speed: 0
High Speed: 0
Underlie Layer: 6
Sdh If Type: gfp (221)
Sdh If Speed: 0
Sdh If Underlie Layer: vconc (6)
Sdh If Vc Type: vc4 (4)
Sdh If Curr Speed: 0
If Tx SL: 27
If Exp SL: 27
If Rx SL: 0
If SL Send Control: automatic (0)
GFP Conf Encaps:
GFP Conf Rx Type Header:
GFP Conf Csf: disabled (0)
GFP Conf Fcs: disable (2)
GFP Conf Rx Client Type:
GFP Conf Rx Fcs:
If Asap Index: 2
Alarm Severity Profile User Label: primary alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-22

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
This section contains various commands related to Ethernet over PDH module
management.
Contents
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh rate {e1 | ds1 | e3 | ds3}
3-23
3-24
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh rxsensitivity {longhaul |

shorthaul}
3-25
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh lbo lbo_value
3-26
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh linecoding {b8zs | ami}
3-27
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh signalmode {esf | sf | cbit |

m23}
3-28
3-29
3-30
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh rate {e1 |

ds1 | e3 | ds3}
Description
This command configures the rate of the PDH interface supporting Ethernet service.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-23
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY

interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh rate {e1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
| ds1 | e3 | ds3}
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
Cli:ADMIN > help interface position r1sr1sl25d0p3 localeth pdh rate
rate
- Configure rate of the PDH interface
supporting Ethernet service.
Syntax:
rate { e1 | ds1 | e3 | ds3 }
{rate}
- Rate of the PDH interface supporting
Ethernet service. Syntax:
{ e1 | ds1 | e3 | ds3 }
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl25d0p3 localeth pdh rate e1
Cli:ADMIN >
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh crc {enable

| disable}
Description
This command configures whether CRC must be enabled or disabled on the PDH signal.
Valid only for e1 rate.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
PRELIMINARY
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-24
Example
Cli:ADMIN > help interface position r1sr1sl25d0p3 localeth pdh crc
crc
- Configure crc for the PDH signal.
Syntax:
crc { enable | disable }
{crc}
- Crc configuration for the PDH signal.
Syntax: { enable | disable }
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl25d0p3 localeth pdh crc enable
PRELIMINARY

interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh crc
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
{enable | disable}
Cli:ADMIN >
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh

rxsensitivity {longhaul | shorthaul}
Description
This command configures the Rx sensitivity of the module. Valid only for e1 and ds1
rates.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-25
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > help interface position r1sr1sl25d0p3 localeth pdh

rxsensitivity
rxsensitivity
- Configure rx sensitivity for the PDH
module. Valid only for e1 and ds1 rates.
Syntax:
rxsensitivity { longhaul | shorthaul }
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
rxsensitivity {longhaul | shorthaul}
{rxsensitivity}
- Rx sensitivity for the PDH module.
Valid only for e1 and ds1 rates. Syntax: { longhaul | shorthaul }
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl25d0p3 localeth pdh
rxsensitivity longhaul
Cli:ADMIN >
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh lbo

lbo_value
Description
This command configures the maximum length of the PDH line. Valid only for ds1 or ds3
rates.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lbo_value
Maximum length of the PDH line. Valid only for ds1 or ds3 rates.Integer. { 04 } for
ds1 rate, { 01 } for ds3 rate.
PRELIMINARY
Example
Cli:ADMIN > help interface position r1sr1sl25d0p4 localeth pdh lbo
lbo
- Configure maximum length of the PDH
line. Valid only for ds1 or ds3 rates. Syntax: Integer. { 0 - 4 }
for ds1 rate, { 0 - 1} for ds3 rate.
{lbo}
- Maximum length of the PDH line. Valid
only for ds1 or ds3 rates. Syntax: Integer. { 0 - 4 } for ds1
rate, { 0 - 1 } for ds3 rate.
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl25d0p4 localeth pdh lbo 0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-26

interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh lbo
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lbo_value
Cli:ADMIN >
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh linecoding

{b8zs | ami}
PRELIMINARY
Description
This command configures the line coding of the interface. Valid only for ds1 rate.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
linecoding
linecoding
- Configure line coding of interface.
Valid only for ds1 rate.
Syntax:
linecoding { b8zs | ami }
{linecoding}
- Line coding of interface. Valid only
for ds1 rate. Syntax: { b8zs | ami }
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl25d0p3 localeth pdh linecoding
ami
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-27
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
signalmode {esf | sf | cbit | m23}
interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh signalmode

{esf | sf | cbit | m23}
Description
This command configures the frame format of the PDH signal. Valid only for ds1 or ds3
rates.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
signalmode
signalmode
- Configure the frame format of the PDH
signal. Valid only for ds1 or ds3 rates. Syntax: { esf | sf } for
ds1 rate, { cbit | m23 } for ds3.
{signalmode}
- Frame format of the PDH signal. Valid
only for ds1 or ds3 rates. Syntax: { esf | sf } for ds1 rate, {
cbit | m23 } for ds3.
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl25d0p3 localeth pdh signalmode
esf
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN >
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-28

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command configures the configuration of the Ethernet over PDH SFP modules.
Full command
PRELIMINARY

interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh config [rate {e1 | ds1 | e3 | ds3}] [crc
{enable | disable}] [rxsensitivity {longhaul | shorthaul}] [lbo lbo_value] [linecoding
{b8zs | ami}] [signalmode {esf | sf | cbit | m23}]
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lbo_value
Maximum length of the PDH line. Valid only for ds1 or ds3 rates.Integer. { 04 } for
ds1 rate, { 01 } for ds3 rate.
Example
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-29
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

config
config
- Configure the Ethernet over PDH SFP
modules.
Syntax:
config [rate { e1 | ds1 | e3 | ds3 }]
[crc { enable | disable}] [rxsensitivity { longhaul | shorthaul }]
[lbo { 0 - 4 }] [linecoding { b8zs | ami }] [signalmode { esf |
sf| cbit | m23 }]
rate
- Rate of the PDH interface supporting
Ethernet service. Syntax:
{ e1 | ds1 | e3 | ds3 }
crc
- Crc configuration for the PDH signal.
Syntax: { enable | disable }
rxsensitivity
- Rx sensitivity for the PDH module.
Valid only for e1 and ds1 rates. Syntax: { longhaul | shorthaul }
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lbo
- Maximum length of the PDH line. Valid
only for ds1 or ds3 rates. Syntax: Integer. { 0 - 4 } for ds1
rate, { 0 - 1 } for ds3 rate.
linecoding
- Line coding of interface. Valid only
for ds1 rate. Syntax: { b8zs | ami }
signalmode
- Frame format of the PDH signal. Valid
only for ds1 or ds3 rates. Syntax: { esf | sf } for ds1 rate, {
cbit | m23 } for ds3.
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl25d0p3 localeth pdh config lbo
3 signalmode esf
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
This command displays the configuration of the Ethernet over PDH SFP modules.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl25d0p3-4 localeth pdh show

Show Ethernet Over PDH Module Info r1sr1sl25d0p3
-------------------------------------------------Sonet/Sdh If Vc Type: pdh-ds1 (15)
Speed: 1533
UnderlieLayer: pdh (2)
ds1 RxSensitivity: long-haul (2)
ds1 LineLength: 3
ds1 LineCoding: ami (1)
ds1 SignalMode: esf (3)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
3-30

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Show Ethernet Over PDH Module Info r1sr1sl25d0p4

-------------------------------------------------Sonet/Sdh If Vc Type: pdh-ds3 (17)
Speed: 44134
UnderlieLayer: pdh (2)
ds3 LineLength: 0
ds3 SignalMode: cbit (4)
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
3-31
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
4thernet port
E
management commands
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to Ethernet port management.

Contents
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-5
interface position naming_set_list localeth defaultflowcontrol {nopause |

asympause | asym&sympause}
4-6
interface position naming_set_list localeth ethasap asap_userlabel
4-7
4-7
4-9
4-11
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth {activate | deactivate}
4-11
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth portservice {ets | bridge | mpls

| iw}
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
VLA profile and Layer2 frames management
4-17
4-17
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set vlanprotprofile

default
4-19
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

activate
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-24
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show vlanset
4-25
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show l2ctrlframe
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-2

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
This section contains various commands related to Ethernet port management over MAU.
Contents
4-3
4-4
4-5
interface position naming_set_list localeth defaultflowcontrol {nopause |

asympause | asym&sympause}
4-6
interface position naming_set_list localeth ethasap asap_userlabel
4-7
4-7
4-9
interface position naming_set_list localeth {activate |

deactivate}
Description
This command creates and administratively enables or disables an Ethernet Local port:
MAU, Ety, Ety/Eth, EFC, Eth_T layers.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

interface position naming_set_list localeth {activate |
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
deactivate}
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list
A list of naming set as naming_set#1[,naming_set#2,naming_set#n] is an

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example displays two commands:
The first command activates a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of the board in
slot 6).
The second command deactivates the same port.
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d1p1 localeth
activate

deactivate
ote: Deactivation of the local interface is necessary to set all the following
commands.
interface position naming_set_list localeth portservice {ets

| bridge | mpls}
Description
This command configures the port type (local). The default E value is ETS.
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-4
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
PRELIMINARY

interface position naming_set_list localeth portservice
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
{ets | bridge | mpls}
Example
1, slot 6).
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d1p1 localeth portservice ets
Cli:ADMIN >
interface position naming_set_list localeth maxmtu

mtu_value
Description
This command configures the port maximum MTU/MRU (local), replacing the default
MTU/MRU value.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
mtu_value
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
An integer value, indicating the MTU/MRU in byte. MTU/MRU allowed and default
values are listed in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and
TSS-160), Release 3.1 TL1 User Provisioning Guide.
PRELIMINARY

interface position naming_set_list localeth maxmtu
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mtu_value
Example
The following example is relevant to the specified port (interface 1, drawer 1, slot 6):
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d1p1 localeth maxmtu 1574

defaultflowcontrol {nopause | asympause | asym&sympause}
Description
This command configures the Ethernet PAUSE frame handling that is applied when
auto-negotiation is disabled.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example shows the command for a specified port (interface 1, drawer 1,
slot 6):
PRELIMINARY

defaultflowcontrol nopause
Cli:ADMIN >
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
asap_userlabel
interface position naming_set_list localeth ethasap

asap_userlabel
Description
This command changes the ASAP pointer associated to the Ethernet layer.
PRELIMINARY

interface position naming_set_list localeth ethasap
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
asap_userlabel
An ASCII string defined by the Operator. Valid characters are letters (both
cases), digits and dash ('-').'
Example
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl28d0p8 localeth ethasap 'allalarms'

Description
This command is useful for script editing (local port).

Full command
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
interface position naming_set_list localeth config [defaulttype {10 | 100 | 1000}]

[rcfcsfaction {none | shutdown}] [rcfssfaction {none | shutdown}] [trafficstatus {enable |
disable}] [floodinglimit floodinglimit_value] [portservice {ets | bridge | mpls}]
[maxmtu mtu_value] [defaultflowcontrol {nopause | asympause |asym&sympause}]
[ethasap asap_userlabel]
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
floodinglimit_value
The flooding rate admitted at the ingress port expressed in kbit/s. Refer to the
User Provisioning Guide.
mtu_value
An integer, indicating the MTU/MRU value. The allowed and default MTU/MRU
TSS-160), Release 3.1 User Provisioning Guide.
asap_userlabel
An operator-defined ASCII string.

Example
The following example shows all local Ethernet interface information relevant to a
specified port:
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl28d0p8 localeth show ethinfo

Show Local Ethernet Interface Info of port r1sr1sl28d0p8
---------------------------------------------------------AdminStatus: down (2)
OperStatus: down (2)
LastChange: 2007-05-30 15:37:23
InterfaceType: eth (6)
Speed: 10000
AvailableBandwidth: 10000
Mtu: 1574
PromiscuousMode: true (1)
PhysAddress:
ConnectorPresent: true (1)
FCSDiscardErroredFrames: true (1)
ClientType: ets (1)
BridgeBasePort: 0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DefaultPause: asymmetric-PAUSE (1)

AdmittedFractionalRate: 200
ConfEncaps: ethernetV2 (1)
AsapIndex: 4
Alarm Severity Profile UserLabel: 'all alarms'
PRELIMINARY

Description
This command retrieves the following local Ethernet port information:
The administrative status
The operative status

The system time at which the port has entered the current operational state
The interface type

The line rate
The available bandwidth
The interface maximum MTU/MRU

The interface mode
The Ethernet local MAC Address (if the local Mac Address is unavailable, it is set to
00:00:00:00:00:00)
If the interface has a physical connector
The handling of incoming errored Ethernet frames

The Ethernet port client layer
The automatically assigned bridge port number
The PAUSE frame handling capability to be applied when auto-negotiation is disabled

The admitted fractional rate
The encapsulation method used by the local Ethernet entity (for example, ethernetV2,
llc-snap)
The ASAP associated to the Ethernet port.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ethinfo
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example shows all local Ethernet interface information relevant to the
specified port (interface 1, drawer 1, slot 6):
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d1p1 localeth show ethinfo
PRELIMINARY
Show Local Ethernet Interface Info of port r1sr1sl6d1p1

---------------------------------------------------------Admin Status: up (1)
Interface Type: eth (6)
Speed: 1000000
Available Bandwidth: 3567587
Mtu: 1574
Promiscuous Mode: true (1)
Phys Address:
Connector Present: true (1)
FCS Discard Errored Frames: true (1)
Client Type: ets (1)
Bridge Base Port: 0
Default Pause: disabled (0)
Admitted Fractional Rate: 1000000
Conf Encaps: ethernetV2 (1)
If Asap Index: 2
Alarm Severity Profile User Label: primary alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

Overview
This section contains various commands related to Ethernet port management over GFP.
Contents
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth {activate | deactivate}
4-11
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth portservice {ets | bridge | mpls

| iw}
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth {activate |

deactivate}
Description
This command administratively enables or disables an Ethernet remote port on either a

GFP port or LAPS port. In case the optional parameter is not specified, it means GFP.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
PRELIMINARY

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth {activate
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
| deactivate}
Example
The following examples display two commands:
The first activates a specific port (interface 2 of drawer 2 of board in slot 6).
The second deactivates the same port.

Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d2p2 remoteeth activate
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d2p2 remoteeth deactivate
ote: Deactivation of the remote interface is necessary to set all subsequent

commands.
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth portservice

{ets | bridge | mpls | iw}
Description
This command configures the port type (remote). The default E value is ETS.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
PRELIMINARY
The following example of the command is relevant to a specific port (interface 2, drawer
2, slot 6):
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d2p2 remoteeth
portservice ets
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mtu_value
interface position naming_set_list remoteeth maxmtu

mtu_value
Description
This command replaces the default MTU/MRU (remote) value with a new port
maximum.
PRELIMINARY

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth maxmtu
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
mtu_value
Example
The following example shows output relevant to the specified port (interface 2, drawer 2,
slot 6):
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d2p6 remoteeth
maxmtu 1574
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-13
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command is useful for script editing (remote port).

Full command

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth config [ratelimited ratelimited_value] [sl {auto | eqptnonspec}] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit
floodinglimit_value] [asap asap_userlabel] [portservice {ets | bridge | mpls |
iw}] [maxmtu mtu_value] [ [[csf {disable | bidir_los | unidir_los | backward_los |
bidir_lof | unidir_lof | backward_lof | univcais}] [fcs {disable | enable}]] | [[flag {one |
two}]
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
ratelimited_value
The maximum allowed rate, measured in Kb/s, configured on GFP/LAPS ports.

floodinglimit_value
The flooding rate admitted at the ingress port, expressed in kbit/s. Refer to the
User Provisioning Guide.
asap_userlabel
An operator-defined ASCII string.
PRELIMINARY
mtu_value
An integer value, indicating the MTU/MRU value. MTU/MRU allowed and default
Example
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-14

Description
This command retrieves the following Ethernet port information (remote):
The administrative status
The operative status

The system time at which the port entered the current operational state
The interface type

The line rate
The available bandwidth
The interface maximum MTU/MRU

The interface mode
The Ethernet local MAC Address (if the local Mac Address is unavailable, it is set to
00:00:00:00:00:00)
The presence or absence of a physical connector for the interface
The handling of incoming errored Ethernet frames
The Ethernet port client layer

The automatically assigned bridge port number
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ethinfo
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list
A list of naming set as naming_set#1[,naming_set#2 ,naming_set#n] is an

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example shows remote Ethernet interface information relevant to the
specified port (interface 2, drawer 2, slot 6):
> interface position r1sr1sl6d2p2 remoteeth show ethinfo
Show Remote Ethernet Interface Info of port r1sr1sl6d2p2

-----------------------------------------------------------Admin Status: down (2)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-15
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ethinfo

Interface Type: rem eth (6)
Speed: 0
Available Bandwidth: 0
Mtu: 1574
Promiscuous Mode: true (1)
Phys Address:
Connector Present: false (2)
FCS Discard Errored Frames: true (1)
ClientType: ets (1)
Bridge Base Port: 0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-16
VLAN profile and Layer2 frames management

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
This section contains various commands related to VLA profile and Layer2 frames
management.
Contents
4-17

default
4-19

activate
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-24
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show vlanset
4-25
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show l2ctrlframe
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-28

vlanprotprofile bind
Description
Full command
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-17
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
This command associates a VLA protocol profile to an Ethernet port configured as an

ETS port. Incoming Ethernet frames, received on the Ethernet interface and matching the
VLA EtherType, are handled as VLA Tagged frames (Q-Tagged or P-Tagged).
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vlanprotprofile bind

Syntax definitions
An expression using naming_set_list and lagnumber_set, separated by

commas. As described below:
A naming_set_list is a list of naming set as naming_set#1[,naming_set#2
,naming_set#n] is an expression using integer values in the range 14094,
ampersand (&) and hyphen (-) for representing board, drawer or port value ranges. For
example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
A lagnumber_set is an expression using integer values (1-124), ampersand (&) and
hyphen (-). For example:
lag4-7&18
: (e.g. r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3,r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6,lag4-7&18,r1sr1sl717d0p10)nnn
The following is an example of a naming_set_list_lagnumber_set
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3,r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6,lag4-7&18,r1sr1sl7-17d0p10

Example
The following shows the output of this command for a specific port (interface 2, drawer
1, slot 6):
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d1p2 vlanprotprofile bind

pippo
Cli:ADMIN >
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-18

vlanprotprofile default
Description
This command associates the default VLA protocol profile with an Ethernet port
configured as an ETS port.
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vlanprotprofile default
Syntax definitions

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
: (e.g. r1sr1sl3-6&18dop1-3,r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6,lag4-7&18,r1sr1sl717d0p10)nnn
Example
1, slot 6):
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d1p2 vlanprotprofile default
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-19
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command creates and activates a VLA protocol profile, defining its user label and
optional EtherType. If the EtherType is not specified, the profile is initiated with
EtherType=0x8100.
Full command

interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set vlanprotprofile activate
vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]
Syntax definitions

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
PRELIMINARY

ethertype_value
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-20
Example
1, slot 6):
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d1p6 vlanprotprofile activate
pippo
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

vlanprotprofile show
Description
This command retrieves a list of all VLA protocol profiles with the corresponding
protocol type. The information can be limited to one VLA profile by indicating its user
label.
Full command

[vlanprotprof_userlabel]
Syntax definitions

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-21
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vlanprotprofile show

Example
1, slot 6):
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d1p2 vlanprotprofile show
pippo
Index Vlan User Label
vlan Ether Type vlan Status
-------- ------------------------------- ---------------- ---------------1
pippo
33024
active (1)

l2ctrlframe
Description
This command configures how layer2 control frames as passed or discarded when
received at a certain Ethernet port, configured as ETS port. All frames specified by the
user as pass are tunneled, and those specified as drop are discarded. The status of all
unspecified frames is unchanged.
Full command

ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-22

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
l2ctrlframe
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
ctrl_frame_32bits
It identifies the control frame types for pass-through or discard and has the following
syntax:
[all] [customerbpdu] [slowprot] [802.1x] [providergvrp] [providerbpdu]
[bridgemgt] [customergmrp] [customergarp] [reserved] [bridgeblock]
[garpblock]
Refer to Defined indexes (p. 1-14) for addition details about ctrl_frame_32bits.
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-23
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
show vlanprotprofile
interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show

vlanprotprofile
Description
This command retrieves the VLA protocol profile associated with a particular Ethernet
port defined as ETS port.
Syntax definitions

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
Example
The following example shows the Vlan Protocol Profile information for a specific port
(interface 2, drawer 1, slot 6):
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d1p2 show vlanprotprofile

Show Vlan Protocol Profile Info r1sr1sl6d1p2
------------------------------------------------Vlan Ether Type: 0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-24

vlanset
Description
This command retrieves the VLAs registered on each indicated port. It also gets the
VLA for the VLA port member set to which each indicated port belongs.
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
show vlanset
Syntax definitions

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-25
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
show l2ctrlframe

l2ctrlframe
Description
This command retrieves the Layer2 control frame management (tunneled or discarded)
associated to a particular Ethernet port defined as ETS port.
Syntax definitions

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
Example
The following example shows L2 Control Frame information relevant to a specific port
(interface 2, drawer 1, slot 6):
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > interface position r1sr1sl6d1p2 show l2ctrlframe
r1sr1sl6d1p2 - Layer2 Protocol List: FFFFFFFFFF [0] [customerbpdu (1)] [providerb
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-26

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
This command creates and activates a VLA protocol profile, defining its user label and
optional EtherType. If the ethertype_value is not specified, the profile is initiated
with EtherType=0x8100.
PRELIMINARY
Full command

vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type ethertype_value]
Syntax definitions

ethertype_value

Example
The following example illustrates two commands:
The first command activates a specific VLA profile.

The second command reports all the relevant VLA user label information.
Cli:ADMIN > vlanprotprofile activate pluto
Cli:ADMIN > vlanprotprofile show
Index
vlan User Label
--------- ----------------------------- --------------1
pippo
33024
active (1)
2
pluto
33024
active (1)
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
4-27
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command deletes a VLA protocol profile.

Syntax definitions

Example
The first command deletes a specific VLan profile.

The second command reports all the relevant VLan user Label information.
Cli:ADMIN > vlanprotprofile delete pluto
Index
vlan User Label
--------- ----------------------------- --------------- -----------1
pippo
33024
active (1)

Description
This command retrieves a list of all VLA protocol profiles with the corresponding
protocol type. The information can be limited to one VLA profile by indicating its user
label.
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY

Example
Index
vlan User Label vlan Ether Type vlan Status
--------- ----------------------------- --------------1
pippo
33024
active (1)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
4-28
PRELIMINARY
5thernet flow and

E
Ethernet flow QOS
management commands
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to Ethernet flow and Ethernet flow QOS
management.
Contents
Classifiers
5-2
5-2
5-4
5-5
Color profile
5-6
colorprofile activate colorprof_userlabel
5-6
5-7
5-8
Traffic descriptor
5-9
trafficdescriptor activate
5-9
trafficdescriptor delete trafficdescriptor_userlabel
5-11
trafficdescriptor config [trafficdescriptor_userlabel]
5-11
trafficdescriptor show [trafficdescriptor_userlabel]
5-12
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
5-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Ethernet flow and Ethernet flow QOS management

commands
Classifiers
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Classifiers
Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to classifiers.

Contents
5-2
5-4
5-5

Description
This command creates, configures, and activates an ETS InFlow classifier. Configuration
can specify the following and the PRI value/range.:
VLA ID value/range
PRI value/range
The IP DSCP specific value/range
The EtherType value
When the VLA or PRI parameter is absent, it is set to dontcare. When the optional
maximum value for VLA or PRI is absent, the corresponding SMP attribute is set to 0.
VLA untagged implicitly means also PRIO untagged.
ote that this command is used for adding classifiers to one that is first defined when an
ETS InFlow is created.
Full command
PRELIMINARY
The full command with all available variables is displayed below:

inflowclassifier add flow_userlabel [vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] [inner_cvlan
{vlan_id[-maxvlan_id]] | dontcare | untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri]] | dontcare |
untagged}] [dscp {dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}] [etype {ethertype_value |
dontcare}] }] [vpi {vpi_id[-maxvpi_id] }] [vci {vci_id[-maxvci_id] }]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
5-2
Classifiers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

vlan_id
An integer value in the set 04094, indicating the VID (or the lower boundary of a
VLA ID range).
PRELIMINARY

commands
maxvlan_id
An integer value in the set 14094. It indicates the upper boundary of a VLA ID
range.
pri
An integer value in the range 07, indicating the Priority, or the lower boundary of
a PRI range.
maxpri
An integer value in the range 07, indicating the upper boundary of a PRI range.
dscp
An integer value in the range 063, indicating the DSCP value, or the lower
boundary of a DSCP range.
maxdscp
An integer value in the range 063, indicating the upper boundary of a DSCP
range.
ethertype_value

vpi_id
An integer value in the range 04095 indicating the ATM VPI, or the lower limit
of a ATM VPI range.
maxvpi_id
An integer value in the range 04095 that indicates the upper limit of an ATM VPI
range.
vci_id
An integer value in the range 065535 indicating the ATM VCI, or the lower limit
of a ATM VCI range.
An integer value in the range 065535 indicating the upper limit of a ATM VCI
range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
5-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
maxvci_id
PRELIMINARY
Classifiers

commands
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
In the following example displays two commands:
The first command adds an ETS InFlow Classifier.
The second command reports all the relevant ETS InFlow Classifier information.
Cli:ADMIN > inflowclassifier add in1flow vlan untagged pri untagged
Cli:ADMIN > inflowclassifier show in1flow
OID
ClassifieClassifieClassifieClassifieClassifieClassifieClassifier
------ -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------1.1 4097
0
9
0
active (1)
1.3 4097
0
9
0
notInServi
1.4 4096
0
8
0
active (1)
2.2
4097
active (1)

Description
This command deletes an ETS InFlow classifier added by previous commands. It cannot
delete the classifier that is defined when a flow is created.
Syntax definitions
classifier_id
An integer number, indicating a specific ETS InFlow classifier.

Example
The following example shows the InFlow classifier information before the command is
used to remove classifier 3.
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > inflowclassifier show

OID
------ -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- ---------1.1 4097
0
9
0
active (1)
1.3 4097
0
9
0
notInServi
1.4 4096
0
8
0
active (1)
2.2 4097
0
9
0
active (1)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
5-4
Classifiers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
In the following example displays two commands:
The first command removes a specific ETS InFlow Classifier.

The second command reports all the updated relevant ETS InFlow Classifier
information.
Cli:ADMIN > inflowclassifier remove 3
PRELIMINARY

commands
OID
------ -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- ---------1.1 4097
0
9
0
active (1)
1.4 4096
0
8
0
active (1)
2.2 4097
0
9
0
active (1)

Description
This command retrieves information for each defined classifier, including classifier index.
The information can be limited to classifiers for a certain ETS InFlow by specifying the
flow user label.
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

Example
The following examples show the command reporting the relevant information:
OID
------ -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- ---------1.1 4097
0
9
0
active (1)
2.2 4097
0
9
0
active (1)
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
5-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

commands
Color profile
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Color profile
Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to color profile.

Contents
5-6
5-7
5-8

Description
This command creates, configures, and activates a color profile.

Each color profile associates PRI or DSCP values with a drop precedence [green(g)
and/or or yellow(y) and/or red(r)].
The command allows the following options:
allg all values are associated with green
ally all values are associated with yellow
DSCP default the default association scheme defined in the Alcatel-Lucent 1850
allr all values are associated with red
Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and TSS-160), Release 3.1 User Provisioning
Guide is used
pri_set the specified PRI values are associated with green, yellow, or red.
dscp_set the specified DSCP values are associated to green, assuming the others
are associated to yellow.
PRELIMINARY
Full command

colorprofile activate colorprof_userlabel {pri {allg | ally | allr | pri_set [g | y | r]
[.... pri_set [g | y | r]]" } | dscp {default | allg | ally | allr | dscp_set [g | y | r][.
dscp_set [g | y | r]]" }}
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
5-6
Color profile
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Syntax definitions
colorprof_userlabel

pri_set
An expression using integer values 0-7, and specific symbols - and & to represent
a set of PRI value ranges associated with green in a color profile.
PRELIMINARY

commands
For instance, 0-3&5 means that the PRI values 0,1,2,3,5 are associated with green
in the color profile. All other PRI values are associated with yellow in that color
profile.
dscp_set
An expression using integer values in the range of 0 ... -63] and specific symbols
for representing a set of DSCP value ranges which are associated with green in
that color profile. For instance, 12-15&55 means that the DSCP values 12, 13, 14,
15 and 55 are associated with green in a color profile.
Example
The following example shows the configuration and activation of a Color Profile.
Cli:ADMIN > colorprofile activate colorprof1 pri allg

Description
This command deletes a Color Profile.

Syntax definitions
colorprof_userlabel

Example
The following example shows two commands.

The first command deletes a specified Color Profile.
The second command shows the updated Color Profiles.
Cli:ADMIN > colorprofile delete colorprof1
Cli:ADMIN > colorprofile show
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
5-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

commands
Color profile
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Index User Label Status Prty0 Prty1 Prty2 Prty3 Prty4 Prty5 Prty6
Prty7
----- ---------- ---------- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

Description
This command retrieves a list of color profiles with their drop precedence information.
The information can be limited to one color profile by indicating its user label.
Syntax definitions
colorprof_userlabel

Example
The following command shows information for the specified Color Profile.
Cli:ADMIN > colorprofile show colorprof1
Index User Label Status Prty0 Prty1 Prty2 Prty3 Prty4 Prty5 Prty6
Prty7
----- ---------- ---------- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----1
colorprof1 active (1) green green green green green green green
green
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN >
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
5-8
Traffic descriptor
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Traffic descriptor
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

commands
This section contains various commands related to traffic descriptor.

Contents
5-9
5-11
5-11
5-12
Description
This command creates, activates, and configures an ETS traffic descriptor.

It is possible to specify the parameters according to IETF (PIR and PBS) or MEF (EIR
and EBS).
ote: SMP parameters are set according to MEF definition, using the relations:
PIR=CIR+EIR, PBS=EBS.
Full command

trafficdescriptor activate trafficdescriptor_userlabel cir cir_value {pir
pir_value | eir eir_value} cbs cbs_value {pbs pbs_value | ebs ebs_value}
[admittedmcrate admitted_mc_rate] [admittedunknrate admitted_unkn_rate]
[trafficmctype {bk | be | reg(4) | reg(3) | reg | reg(1)| gua(2) | gua}] [trafficunktype {bk | be
| reg(4) | reg(3) | reg | reg(1)| gua(2) | gua}] [policingmode {undefined | color-blind |
ietfc-aware | mefc-awarenocoupling | mefc-aware-withcoupling}]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
5-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY

commands
Traffic descriptor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
cir_value
An integer number, in the range 3 kbit/s - port line rate, in 1 kbit/s increments.
pir_value
eir_value
cbs_value
An integer number, in the range 064 MB in 1 byte increments.

pbs_value
An integer number, in the range [0-min [64 MB, 256 * corresponding_CBS]], in 1

byte increments.
ebs_value
An integer number, in the range [0-min [64MB, 256 * corresponding_CBS]] in 1

byte increments.
admitted_mc_rate
admitted_unkn_rate
Example
The following example shows the activation and configuration of a Traffic Descriptor:.
Cli:ADMIN > trafficdescriptor activate TDTest1 traffictype be cir 0
pir 1000 cbs 0 pbs 6400
CLI msg: already present TD User Label
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN >
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
5-10
Traffic descriptor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command deletes an ETS traffic descriptor.

Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY

commands

Example
The following example shows the deletion of a specific Traffic Descriptor:

Cli:ADMIN > trafficdescriptor delete TDTest1
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
This command configures an ETS traffic descriptor without changing the assigned Traffic
Descriptor type.
ote: SMP parameters are set according to MEF definition via the relations:
PIR=CIR+EIR, PBS= EBS.
Full command

trafficdescriptor config trafficdescriptor_userlabel cir cir_value {pir
pir_value | eir eir_value} cbs cbs_value {pbs pbs_value | ebs ebs_value}
[admittedmcrate admitted_mc_rate] [admittedunknrate admitted_unkn_rate]
[trafficmctype {bk | be | reg(4) | reg(3) | reg | reg(1)| gua(2) | gua}] [trafficunktype {bk | be
| reg(4) | reg(3) | reg | reg(1)| gua(2) | gua}] [policingmode {undefined | color-blind |
ietfc-aware | mefc-awarenocoupling | mefc-aware-withcoupling }]
Syntax definitions

cir_value
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
5-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

commands
Traffic descriptor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pir_value
eir_value
cbs_value
An integer number, in the range 064 MB in 1 byte increments.

pbs_value
An integer number, in the range [0-min [64 MB, 256 * corresponding_CBS]], in 1

byte increments.
ebs_value
An integer number, in the range [0-min [64MB, 256 * corresponding_CBS]] in 1

byte increments.
admitted_mc_rate
admitted_unkn_rate
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command retrieves the following information for an ETS traffic descriptor:
Traffic type
Traffic parameters
Status
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
5-12
Traffic descriptor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
The following example shows information about all active Traffic descriptors:
Cli:ADMIN > trafficdescriptor show
Index User Label TD Status
TD Type cir
pir
cbs
pbs
----- ---------- ------------- ---------- -------- -------1
nullBeTD active (1) bestEffort 0
0
0
0
2
TDTest1 active (1) bestEffort 0
1000
0
64000
PRELIMINARY

commands
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
5-13
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
S6ervices management
commands
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to services management.

Contents
6-3
flow show
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-9
6-10
6-10
6-12
6-12
6-13
6-14
ETS-to-Provider bridge ETS/PW/VPLS ingress unidirectional flow
6-15
6-15
6-19
pbflowinunidir delete [flow_userlabel]
6-20
6-20
Provider bridge/PW/VPLS to ETS egress unidirectional flow
6-21
pbflowoutunidir activate flow_userlabel
6-21
6-23
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pbflowoutunidir show [flow_userlabel] [flowtype { pb | pw | vpls }]
6-23
6-25
6-25
6-27
cepst deactivate port naming
6-28
6-29
6-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-2

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
This section contains various commands related to general flow management.

Contents
flow show
6-3
flow show
Description
This command retrieves the following information for a specific flow, all configured
flows with a specified service type (pb, pw, vpls,atm), a specific port, or all ports if an
flow optional parameter is not specified:
The flow index

The flow user label
The flow type

provider bridge bidirectional
provider bridge unidirectional inbound (ingress)
provider bridge unidirectional outbound (egress)
port-to-port
Full command

flow show [flow_userlabel] [port {naming | lagnumber}][flowtype { pb | pw | vpls
| atm}]
Syntax definitions

naming
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
flow_userlabel
PRELIMINARY

flow show
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
When a field is meaningless for naming a resource, the field is omitted in the naming.
In commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board0 and
drawer=port=0. In commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack,
board.
lagnumber
An expression lagN, where N is an integer value in the range [1124], indicating the
number of a link aggregation group.
For example: lag18
Example
The following example shows information about all configured flows:

Cli:ADMIN > flow show
LabelKey Flow User Label
Flow Type
InFlow Port OutFlow Port
================================================================
#1.1.1
''
portportbid (3) r1sr1sl18d1p6 r1sr1sl18d2p2
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN >
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-4

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETS-to-Provider bridge ETS/PW/VPLS bidirectional

flow
Overview
PRELIMINARY
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to ETS-to-Provider bridge

ETS/PW/VPLS bidirectional flow.
Contents
6-5
6-9
6-10
6-10

Description
This command creates, configures, and activates an ETS InFlow/OutFlow and the
Provider Bridge/PW/VPLS ETS InFlow/OutFlow on which it is transported. The
command also creates the cross-connection between them.
Full command
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
pbflowbid activate flow_userlabel port {naming | lagnumber} [inflowclassifier

[vlan {vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] [inner_cvlan vlan_id[-maxvlan_id]] | dontcare |
untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] [inner_cpri pri[-maxpri]] | dontcare | untagged}] [dscp
{dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}]] [etype {ethertype_value | dontcare }] ]
trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel {svlan vlan_id | pw pw_id | vpls
vpls_userlabel | etsport2 {naming | lagnumber} } [l2ctrlframe
ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}] [policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware |
mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled}] [colorprofile colorprof_userlabel]
[pop [swap swap_cvlan vlan_id swap_mode {colorblind | coloraware} swap_cpri pri
[swap_cpriyellow priyellow]]] [push cvlan vlan_id mode {colorblind | coloraware}
cpri pri [cpriyellow priyellow]] [outtraffictype {bk | be | reg(4) | reg(3) | reg | reg(1) |
gua(2) | gua}]
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration options
Configuration includes:
Classification mode based on PRI bits
Classifier definition and association

The operator can add new classifiers for an ETS InFlow (see Classifiers (p. 5-2)).
However, the operator cannot delete the first defined classifier without deleting the
entire PB flow. The operator can delete later defined classifiers at any time.
Traffic descriptor association to the ETS InFlow carries information for CoS and
traffic descriptor parameters
Traffic descriptor association to the ETS Provider Bridge InFlow carries
information for CoS with null traffic descriptor parameters. If not present, the CoS of
the ETS InFlow in the corresponding bidirectional connection is used.
One of the following:

SVID definition for the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow
PW for PW ETS InFlow/OutFlow
VPLS ID for VPLS ETS InFlow/OutFlow
Output Interface for Ethernet ETS InFlow/OutFlow
Management of the received L2 Control Frames (tunneled or discarded) for the ETS
InFlow.
L2 Control Frames, configured to be discarded at the ETS flow level will be classified
as not belonging to the ETS flow by the ETS classifier. L2 Control Frames,
configured to be tunneled or selectively tunnelled at the ETS flow level, will be
classified as belonging to the ETS flow only if they match all the other ETS classifier
criteria.
Since transport network is based on the Provider Bridge, L2 control frames with a
MAC DA of 01-80-C2-00-00-08 must be discarded, independent of user
configuration.
If the L2 control frame optional parameter is absent, all L2 control frames (except
those with MAC DA 01-80-C2-00-00-08) are tunnelled by default.
Policing for the ETS InFlow can be either:
Color blind
IETF color-aware
MEF color-aware without coupling flag
MEF coloraware with coupling flag
Disabled
PRELIMINARY

Color profile association to the ETS InFlow.

If this parameter is absent, a color profile with drop precedence of green for any
priority is associated by default with the ETS InFlow.
VLA pop enabling/disabling on the ETS InFlow.

If this parameter is absent, pop operation is disabled by default.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VLA push configuration on the ETS OutFlow.

This consists of enabling/disabling push operation on ETS OutFlow, configuring:
The VID to be pushed
The colorblind/coloraware meaning of the PRI
The PRI to be pushed for all frames (in colorblind mode) or only for green frames
(in coloraware mode)
The PRI to be pushed for yellow frames in coloraware mode.
If this parameter is absent, a PRI of 0 is applied by default.
If VLA push configuration parameter is absent, push operation is disabled by
default.
ETS group to which the ETS Inflow belongs.
This optional information is an alternative to the traffic descriptor/policing/color
profile configuration.
When the ETS Inflow belongs to an ETS group (flowgroup is specified), the operator
must omit:
Policing
Color profile
ETS Cross-connection set-up
PRELIMINARY

Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
When a field is meaningless as naming a resource, this field is omitted from the naming.
For Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160, drawer is not supported. The value must
always be 0.
lagnumber
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
For commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board, and
drawer=0, and port. For commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack,
subrack, board, and port.
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For example: lag18
vlan_id
An integer value in the range 04094, indicating the VID (the lower boundary of a VLA
ID range).
maxvlan_id
Uses the same syntax as vlan_id, and indicates the upper boundary of a VLA ID range.
pri
An integer value in the range 07, indicating the Priority (the lower boundary of a PRI
range).
maxpri
Uses the same syntax as pri, and indicates the upper boundary of a PRI range.
dscp
An integer value in the range 0-63, indicating the DSCP value, or the lower boundary of a
DSCP range.
maxdscp
An integer value in the range 0-63, indicating the upper boundary of a DSCP range.
ethertype_value


pw_id
An integer value in the range of 1-4294967295, indicating the MPLS PW Index.

vpls_userlabel
An octet string used as a VPLS Instance identifier.

ctrl_frame_32bits
PRELIMINARY
syntax:
[all] [customerbpdu] [slowprot] [802.1x] [providergvrp] [bridgemgt]
[customergmrp] [customergarp] [reserved] [bridgeblock] [garpblock]
colorprof_userlabel

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
priyellow
flowgroup_userlabel
PRELIMINARY
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command specifies the L2 Control Frames that should be tunneled or discarded by a
previously created ETS InFlow.
Since transport network is based on Provider Bridge, the L2 control frames with a MAC
DA of 01-80-C2-00-00-08 must be discarded, independent of user configuration.
Traffic descriptor association to the ETS InFlow carries information of CoS and traffic
descriptor parameters. ote that CoS of Traffic Descriptor cannot change.
Full command

pbflowbid config flow_userlabel [l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}]
[trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel]
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

ctrl_frame_32bits
It identifies the control frame types for managing their passing through or discarding and it
has the following syntax:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command deletes an ETS InFlow/OutFlow, the Provider Bridge ETS

InFlow/OutFlow on which it is transported, and the corresponding cross-connections.
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

Example
Cli:ADMIN > pbflowbid delete f001
pbflowbid show [flow_userlabel] [flowtype { pb | pw | vpls

}]
Description
This command retrieves details for all defined ETS InFlow/OutFlow along with the
Provider Bridge/PW/VPLS ETS InFlow/OutFlow on which they are transported.
By specifying a user label, this command can also provide detailed information about a
specific ETS InFlow/OutFlow and the Provider Bridge/PW/VPLS ETS InFlow/OutFlow
on which it is transported.
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
flow_userlabel
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-10
Example
Cli:ADMIN > pbflowbid show
FlowLabelKey Flow UserLabel Flow Type
===================================================================
@41.1.1
'AXL001'
pbflowbid (2) r1sr1sl3d0p1 r1sr1sl3d0p1
@43.3.3
'AXL002'
pbflowbid (2) r1sr1sl3d0p4 r1sr1sl3d0p4
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

pbflowbid show [flow_userlabel] [flowtype { pb | pw |
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vpls }]
PRELIMINARY

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to ETS-to-ETS bidirectional transparent

mapping.
Contents
6-12
6-13
6-14
portportbid activate flow_userlabel port1 naming port2

naming
Description
This command creates, configures, and activates a port-to-port configuration. This means
a local ETS InFlow/OutFlow is transparently cross-connected to an ETS InFlow/OutFlow
in such a way that all traffic incoming from one ETS is transmitted to the other one.
PRELIMINARY
Classifier definition: default classifier is applied (for example, don't-care for VLA or
PRI) values. o other classifier can be added by operator.
Traffic descriptor association: BE ULL traffic descriptor is applied.
Management of the received L2 Control Frames: all control frames are tunneled.
Policy management: it is disabled.
Color profile association: a default color profile with a drop precedence of green for
any priority is applied.
VLA pop enabling/disabling: it is disabled.

VLA push configuration: it is disabled by default.
ETS cross-connection set-up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
naming
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

naming
PRELIMINARY

portportbid activate flow_userlabel port1 naming port2
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
When a field is meaningless as naming a resource, the field is omitted from naming. For
Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160, drawer is not supported and the value must
always be 0.
Example
The following example shows the command for specific ports:

Cli:ADMIN > portportbid activate in1flow port1 r1sr1sl6d1p3 port2
r1sr1sl6d1p4

Description
This command deletes the coupling of ETS InFlow/OutFlow and the transparent
connection between them.
Syntax definitions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-13
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
flow_userlabel
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
The following example shows the command for a deletion:

Cli:ADMIN > portportbid delete in1flow
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
This command retrieves the list of ETS InFlow/OutFlow pairs that are transparently
connected.
This command also retrieves detailed information about a single pair, by specifying the
corresponding flow user label.
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

Example
The following example shows the command reporting the relevant information:
Cli:ADMIN > portportbid show
PRELIMINARY
InFlow User Label

XC Type
===============================================================
in1flow
portportbid (2) r1sr1sl6d1p3 r1sr1sl6d1p4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-14
ETS-to-Provider bridge ETS/PW/VPLS ingress

unidirectional flow
Overview
PRELIMINARY

unidirectional flow
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to ETS-to-Provider bridge

ETS/PW/VPLS ingress unidirectional flow.
Contents
6-15
6-19
6-20
6-20

Description
This command creates, configures, and activates an ETS InFlow and the Provider
Bridge/PW/VPLS ETS OutFlow on which it is transported. The command also creates the
cross-connection between them.
Full command
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-15
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
pbflowinunidir activate flow_userlabel port {naming |

lagnumber}[classificationmode {pri | dscp} ][inflowclassifier [vlan {vlan_id[maxvlan_id] | dontcare | untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] | dontcare | unntagged}] [dscp
{dscp[-maxdscp] | dontcare | noip}]] [etype {ethertype_value | dontcare }] }]
trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel{svlan vlan_id | pw pw_id | vpls
vpls_userlabel | etsport2 (naming | lagnumber} } [l2ctrlframe
ctrl_frame_32bits {pass | drop}] [policingmode {c-blind | ietfc-aware |
mefc-aware-cf0 | mefc-aware-cf1 | disabled}] [colorprofile colorprofile_userlabel] [pop [swap swap_cvlan vlan_id swap_mode {colorblind | coloraware}
swap_cpri pri [swap_cpriyellow priyellow]]]
PRELIMINARY

unidirectional flow
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuration options
Classification mode based on PRI bits or IP DSCP bits
Classifier definition and association

The operator can add new classifiers for an ETS InFlow (see Classifiers (p. 5-2)).
However, the operator cannot delete the first defined classifier without deleting the
entire PB flow. The operator can delete later defined classifiers at any time.
Traffic descriptor association to the ETS InFlow carries information for CoS and
traffic descriptor parameters
SVID definition for the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow
PW Identifier
VPLS Instance
Output Ethernet/LAG Interface in case of Ethernet ETS to Ethernet ETS connectivity.

Management of the received L2 Control Frames (tunneled or discarded) for the ETS
InFlow.
L2 Control Frames, configured to be discarded at the ETS flow level will be classified
as not belonging to the ETS flow by the ETS classifier. L2 Control Frames,
configured to be tunneled at the ETS flow level, will be classified as belonging to the
ETS flow only if they match all the other ETS classifier criteria.
Since transport network is based on the Provider Bridge, L2 control frames with a
MAC DA of 01-80-C2-00-00-08 must be discarded, independent of user
configuration.
If the L2 control frame optional parameter is absent, all L2 control frames (except
those with MAC DA 01-80-C2-00-00-08) are tunnelled by default.
The actual disposition of each frame is determined by the
opticsIMETSInFlowL2ActualProtocolList object that is the logical bit-by-bit AD
between the opticsIMETSInFlowLayer2ProtocolList and the
opticsIMEthLayer2ProtocolList object configured on the Ethernet port with ifIndex
equal to opticsIMETSInFlowServiceID.
Policing for the ETS InFlow can be either:
PRELIMINARY
Color blind
IETF color-aware
MEF color-aware without coupling flag
MEF coloraware with coupling flag
Disabled
Color profile association to the ETS InFlow.

If this parameter is absent, a default color profile with a drop precedence of green for
any priority/dscp is associated with the ETS InFlow.
VLA pop enabling/disabling on the ETS InFlow. If this parameter is absent, pop
operation is disabled by default.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-16
VLA push configuration on the ETS OutFlow consists of enabling or disabling push
operation on ETS OutFlow irrespective of ETS OutFlow Server Types (Ethernet, pw,
and vpls) by configuring:
The PRI to be pushed for all frames in colorblind mode, or only for green frames
in coloraware mode
The PRI to be pushed for yellow frames in coloraware mode. If this parameter is
absent, PRI=0 is applied by default.
PRELIMINARY

unidirectional flow
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETS group to which the ETS Inflow belongs.

This optional information is an alternative to the traffic descriptor/policing/color
profile configuration.
When the ETS Inflow belongs to an ETS group (flowgroup is specified), the operator
must omit:
Traffic descriptor (the BE ULL traffic descriptor)
Policing
Color profile
ETS Cross-connection set-up
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
always be 0.
lagnumber
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-17
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

unidirectional flow
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For example: lag18
vlan_id
ID range).
maxvlan_id
pri
range).
maxpri
dscp
An integer value in the range of 0-63, indicating the DSCP value, or the lower limit of a
DSCP range.
maxdscp
An integer value in the range of 0-63, indicating the upper limit of a DSCP range.
ethertype_value


pw_id

vpls_userlabel

ctrl_frame_32bits
PRELIMINARY
syntax:
colorprof_userlabel

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-18
priyellow
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY

unidirectional flow
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command configures whether L2 Control Frames should be tunneled or discarded by

a previously created ETS InFlow.
Since the transport network is based on Provider Bridge, L2 control frames with a MAC
DA of 01-80-C2-00-00-08 must be discarded, independent of user configuration.
Full command

pbflowinunidir config flow_userlabel l2ctrlframe ctrl_frame_32bits {pass |
drop} [trafficdescriptor trafficdescriptor_userlabel]
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

ctrl_frame_32bits
syntax:
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-19
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Example
PRELIMINARY

unidirectional flow
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command deletes an ETS InFlow, the Provider Bridge ETS OutFlow on which it is
transported, and the corresponding cross-connection.
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

Example
To be supplied.
pbflowinunidir show [flow_userlabel] [flowtype { pb | pw |

vpls }]
Description
This command retrieves a list of all defined ETS InFlows including the Provider Bridge
ETS OutFlows on which they are transported.
By specifying the user label, this command provides detailed information for a specific
ETS InFlow and the Provider Bridge ETS OutFlow on which it is transported.
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-20
Provider bridge/PW/VPLS to ETS egress

unidirectional flow
Overview
PRELIMINARY
Provider bridge/PW/VPLS to ETS egress unidirectional

flow
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to Provider bridge/PW/VPLS to ETS

egress unidirectional flow.
Contents
6-21
6-23
pbflowoutunidir show [flow_userlabel] [flowtype { pb | pw | vpls }]
6-23

Description
This command creates, configures and activates an ETS OutFlow and the Provider Bridge
ETS InFlow on which it is transported. The command also creates the cross-connection
between them.
The SVID definition for the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow.
The VLA push configuration on the ETS OutFlow.

It consists in enabling/disabling push operation on ETS OutFlow, configuring:
The PRI to be pushed for all frames (in colorblind mode) or only for green frames
(in coloraware mode)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-21
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
The PRI to be pushed for yellow frames in coloraware mode. If this parameter is
absent, a default PRI of 0 is applied.
If VLA push configuration parameter is absent, push operation is disabled by
default.
PRELIMINARY

flow
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ETS Cross-connection set-up.

CoS for the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow. (If not provided, the Regulated GUA CoS is
used.)
Full command

pbflowoutunidir activate flow_userlabel port {naming | lagnumber} {svlan
vlan_id | pw pw_id | vpls vpls_userlabel} [push cvlan vlan_id mode {colorblind
| coloraware} cpri pri [cpriyellow priyellow]] [outtraffictype {be{bk | be | reg(4) |
reg(3) | reg | reg(1)| gua(2) | gua}]
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
always be 0.
lagnumber
For example: lag18
PRELIMINARY
vlan_id
ID range).
pw_id

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-22
vpls_userlabel

pri
range).
PRELIMINARY

flow
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
priyellow
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command deletes an ETS OutFlow, the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow on which it is
transported, and the corresponding cross-connection.
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

Example
To be supplied.
pbflowoutunidir show [flow_userlabel] [flowtype { pb | pw

| vpls }]
Description
This command retrieves a list of all defined ETS OutFlows with the
Bridge/MPLS/PW/VPLS ETS InFlows on which they are transported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-23
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
By specifying the corresponding user label, this command also retrieves detailed
information about a specific ETS OutFlow and the Provider Bridge/MPLS/PW/VPLS
ETS OutFlow on which it is transported.
PRELIMINARY

flow
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pbflowoutunidir show [flow_userlabel] [flowtype { pb |
pw | vpls }]
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-24
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
This section contains various commands related to dual-homing management.

Contents
6-25
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-31

Description
This command creates, configures, and activates an ETS InFlow/OutFlow, which

selectively classifies the customer STP/RSTP/MSTP BPDU.
This can be one of the following:
The Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow associated to an already registered

SVLA, on which classified frames will be transported.
The pseudowire ETS InFlow/OutFlow associated with an already registered
pseudowire, on which classified frames will be transported.
This command also creates a cross-connection between the corresponding Inflow and
Outflow.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-25
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Classification The classifier takes the incoming untagged frames. The

classification process is completed by the ETS Inflow L2 CTRL frame configuration
(described below).
The traffic descriptor association to the ETS InFlow. This carries information for the
CoS and traffic descriptor parameters. They contain the fixed values for the
guaranteed CoS, and minimum vales for CIR and PIR (3 Kbit/s).
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The SVID definition for the Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow, or the Pseudowire
for a Pseudowire ETS InFlow/OutFlow. The SVID carries the C-BPDU through the
service provider network between the service provider nodes facing the customer
network.
Management of the received L2 control frames, tunneled or discarded, for the ETS
InFlow.
C-BPDU must be tunneled. All other L2 control frames must be discarded. Data
frames, represented by bit 0 of the L2CTRL 32-bit string, must also be discarded.
ote that the actual disposition of each frame is determined by the
equal to opticsIMETSInFlowServiceID. So C-BPDU must be tunneled on the
opticsIMEthLayer2ProtocolList of the relevant port.
Policing for the ETS InFlow It is disabled.
The Color profile association with the ETS InFlow A color profile with a drop
precedence of green for any priority is associated with the ETS InFlow.
VLA pop enabling/disabling on the ETS InFlow The pop operation is disabled.
VLA push configuration on the ETS OutFlow The push operation is disabled.
The ETS group to which the ETS Inflow belongs o flow group is allowed.
Full command

cbpdu activate flow_userlabel port naming [inflowclassifier [vlan
{vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare | untagged] [inner_cvlan vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] |
dontcare | untagged}] [pri {pri[-maxpri] [inner_cpri pri[-maxpri] | dontcare}]] {svlan
vlan_id | pw pw_id }
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

naming
PRELIMINARY
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-26
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Port
0 or 11023
always be 0.
PRELIMINARY
vlan_id
ID range).
maxvlan_id
pri
range).
maxpri
pw_id

Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command creates, configures, and activates a CEPST instance over a Provider
Bridge UI port.
Syntax definitions
naming
R
Rack
Subrack
17
0 or 17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-27
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
always be 0.
port_path_cost
The port path cost. Its value depends on the link speed of the port (e.g. if the link speed of
the port is Mbit/s, the port_path_cost is an integer value in the range 1200000000. The
default value is 20,000,000.
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command deactivates a CEPST instance over a Provider Bridge UI port.
Syntax definitions
naming
PRELIMINARY
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
always be 0.
PRELIMINARY
Example
To be supplied.

Description

selectively classifies the untagged service STP/RSTP/MSTP BPDU, and the ETS
InFlow/OutFlow on which classified frames will be transported. The InFlow/OutFlow can
be Provider Bridge ETS InFlow/OutFlow associated to an already registered SVLA, or
pseudowire ETS InFlow/OutFlow associated to an already registered pseudowire.
This command creates also the cross-connection between the corresponding Inflow and
Outflow.
Classification The classifier takes the incoming untagged frames.

The classification process is completed by the ETS Inflow L2 CTRL frame
configuration (described below).
The traffic descriptor association to the ETS InFlow
This carries information for the CoS and traffic descriptor parameters. They contain
the fixed values for the guaranteed COS, and 3Kbs values for CIR and PIR, and CBS
and PBS equal to MTU on a per E basis, via the opticsimeMtu SMP attribute.
for a Pseudowire ETS InFlow/OutFlow.
The SVID carries the S-BPDU through the service provider network between the
service provider nodes facing the customer network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-29
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
InFlow.
S-BPDU must be tunneled. All other L2 control frames must be discarded. Data
frames, represented by bit 0 of the L2CTRL 32-bit string, must also be discarded.
ote that the actual disposition of each frame is determined by the
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

equal to opticsIMETSInFlowServiceID. So C-BPDU must be tunneled on the
opticsIMEthLayer2ProtocolList of the relevant port.
Policing for the ETS InFlow It is disabled.
Full command

sbpdu activate flow_userlabel port naming [inflowclassifier [vlan
{vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] [inner_cvlan vlan_id[-maxvlan_id] | dontcare | untagged}]
[pri {pri[-maxpri] [inner_cpri pri[-maxpri]] | dontcare}]] {svlan vlan_id | pw
pw_id }
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

vlan_id
An integer value in the range of 14094, indicating the VID (the lower boundary of a
VLA ID range).
naming
PRELIMINARY
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-30
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
always be 0.
PRELIMINARY
vlan_id
VLA ID range).
maxvlan_id
pri
range).
maxpri
pw_id

Example
To be supplied.
vrrp activate flow_userlabel port naming {svlan vlan_id |

pw pw_id}
Description

selectively classifies the service VRRP PDU, and the ETS InFlow/OutFlow on which
classified frames will be transported. The InFlow/OutFlow can be Provider Bridge ETS
InFlow/OutFlow associated to an already registered SVLA, or pseudowire ETS
InFlow/OutFlow associated to an already registered pseudowire.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-31
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
This command creates also the cross-connection between the corresponding Inflow and
Outflow.
PRELIMINARY
vrrp activate flow_userlabel port naming {svlan
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vlan_id | pw pw_id}
Classification The classifier takes the incoming untagged frames.

The classification process is completed by the ETS Inflow L2 CTRL frame
configuration (described below).
The traffic descriptor association to the ETS InFlow

This carries information for the CoS and traffic descriptor parameters. They contain
the fixed values for the guaranteed COS, and minimum vales for CIR and PIR (3
Kbit/s).
for a Pseudowire ETS InFlow/OutFlow.
The SVID carries the S-BPDU through the service provider network between the
service provider nodes facing the customer network.
InFlow. VRRP PDU must be tunneled. All other L2 control frames must be discarded.
Data frames, represented by bit 0 of the L2CTRL 32-bit string, must also be
discarded.
Policing for the ETS InFlow It is color-blind.
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

naming
PRELIMINARY
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
6-32
always be 0.
PRELIMINARY
vrrp activate flow_userlabel port naming {svlan
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vlan_id | pw pw_id}
vlan_id
VLA ID range).
pw_id

Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
6-33
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
7 AC/Virtual/Provider
M
bridge port and bridge
port QOS management
commands
Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to generic configuration.

Contents
7-1
bridge show type
7-2
7-2

Description
This command configures the bridge type on Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example contains two commands:

The first is sets the bridge type configuration.
The second shows the type of bridge configured for the E.
Cli:ADMIN > bridge type provider
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
7-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
MAC/Virtual/Provider bridge port and bridge port QOS

management commands
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
>> message: successful completed command!!

Cli:ADMIN > bridge show type
Bridge Type: provider bridge8021ad (3)
The following example shows the response from the E when a configuration is already
present.
Cli:ADMIN > bridge type virtual
>> warning: already present value for Bridge Type of
bridge show type

Description
This command displays the bridge type that is configured on Alcatel-Lucent 1850
TSS-320 and TSS-160.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example displays the configured bridge type:

Cli:ADMIN > bridge show type
Bridge Type: virtual bridge8021Q (2)

Description
This command configures the Provider Bridge Operation mode.

Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
/A
Example
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
7-2
VLAN registration entry management

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

management commands
This section contains various commands related to VLA registration entry management.
Contents
7-3
7-5
bridge vlan add vlan_set
7-6
7-7
7-9

Description
This command creates a static VLA registration entry in a Virtual bridge, or an

S-VLA registration entry in a Provider bridge.
It specifies the VID, VLA Port Member Set, and VLA Port Untagged Set. All
identified ports are added to the VLA Port Member Set. When the u keyword is
specified for a port entry, the port is also added to the corresponding VLA Port
Untagged Set.
When the optional port set parameter is absent, the VLA port member set remains
empty.
A static VLA registration entry, VID=1, is automatically created. All virtual bridge ports
are in VID=1, VLA Port Member Set, and VLA Port Untagged Set.
Full command
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
7-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
bridge vlan activate vlan_set [portset naming_set_list_lagnumber_set [u]

[naming_set_list_lagnumber_set [u] naming_set_list_lagnumber_set
[u]]]
PRELIMINARY

management commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Syntax definitions
vlan_set
An expression using integer values in the range 14094, and specific symbols, for
For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLA values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555
are specified.

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
Example
PRELIMINARY
The first activates a VLA.

The second command displays information about all VLAs configured on the E.
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlan activate 1000
>> message: executed command for Vlan Id. .1000
>>message: successful completed command !!
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlan show
Index Vlan Status
-------- -----------------------------1
active (1)
1000
active (1)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
7-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The first command shows a configuration for a specific VLA (2000) associated to a
specific port (interface 2, drawer 1, slot 6).
The second command displays information about all VLAs configured for the E.
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlan activate 2000 portset r1sr1sl6d1p2
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlan show
Index Vlan Status
-------- -----------------------------1
active (1)
1000
active (1)
2000
active (1)
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY

management commands

Description
This command deletes a static VLA or S-VLA registration entry by specifying its
VLA ID. This command flushes the IVL dynamic entries in the filtering database, and
removes the IVL static entries defined for the VID.
Syntax definitions
vlan_set
are specified.
Example
The following example shows the deletion of a specific VLA (1000).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
7-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlan delete 1000

Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY

management commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command adds ports to a VLA Port Member Set and/or VLA Port Untagged Set
for a static VLA or S-VLA registration entry.
If u is not specified for a port entry, it is added to only the VLA Port Member Set.
If u is specified for a port entry, it is added to the VLA Port Member Set and the
VLA Port Untagged Set.
ote: When a port is already in a VLA Port Member Set, it is only added to the
VLA Port Untagged Set.
Full command

bridge vlan add vlan_set portset naming_set_list_lagnumber_set [u]
[naming_set_list_lagnumber_set [u] naming_set_list_lagnumber_set [u]]
Syntax definitions
vlan_set
are specified.

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
PRELIMINARY
lag4-7&18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
7-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Example
The following example shows the command to add specific ports (interface 3 and 5 of
drawer 1 of the board in slot 6) to a specific VLA (2000).
PRELIMINARY

management commands
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlan add 2000 portset r1sr1sl6d1p3&5

The following example displays information about VLA 2000.

Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlan show 2000
Show Info of Vlan .2000
------------------------Vlan Status: active (1)
VlanStaticEgressPorts: r1sr1sl6d1p2-3&5
VlanStaticUntaggedPorts:
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
This command removes ports from a VLA Port Member Set and/or VLA Port
Untagged Set for a static VLA or S-VLA registration entry.
If u is not specified for a port entry, it is removed from only the VLA Port Untagged
Set.
If u is specified for a port entry, it is removed from the VLA Port Member Set and
the VLA Port Untagged Set.
This command triggers the removal of IVL static entries, and the flushing of IVL dynamic
entries in the Filtering Database for each port being removed from VLA port member
set <port, VID>.
bridge vlan remove vlan_set portset naming_set_list_lagnumber_set [u]
[naming_set_list_lagnumber_set [u] naming_set_list_lagnumber_set [u]]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
7-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Full command
PRELIMINARY

management commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Syntax definitions
vlan_set
are specified.

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
Example
The following example shows the command to remove a specific port (interface 2 of
drawer 1 of the board in slot 6) from a specific VLA (2000).
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlan remove 2000 portset r1sr1sl6d1p2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
7-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves static VLA or S-VLA registration entry information.

ote: The ports in the VID VLA port member set and VLA port untagged set, are
indicated by their naming information.
PRELIMINARY

management commands
Syntax definitions
vlan_set
are specified.
Example
The following example shows all information about a specific VLA (1000).
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlan show 1000
Show Info of Vlan .1000
------------------------Vlan Status: active (1)
VlanStaticEgressPorts: r1sr1sl6d1p1
VlanStaticUntaggedPorts:
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
7-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

management commands

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to bridge port management.

Contents
7-10
bridge port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show info [vlan vlan_set]
7-12
7-14
bridge port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set vlanprotprofile bind
7-14
7-15
bridge vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel [type

ethertype_value]
7-16
7-17
7-17

Description
This command configures:
PRELIMINARY
The status of ingress filtering on a Virtual/Provider etwork bridge port. The default
is ingress filtering enabled.
Virtual/Provider etwork bridge port acceptance of VLA-tagged frames only, or all
frames. The default setting is to admit all.
The PVID for a Virtual/Provider etwork bridge port. The default value for the
VLA ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-tagged frames received on this port
is 1.
The default user priority associated with untagged frames received on a MAC/Virtual/
Provider etwork bridge port. The default value is 0.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
7-10

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The regeneration user table associated with Priority-tagged and Q-tagged frames
received on a Virtual/Provider etwork bridge port. The default value is for identity
mapping.
PCP encoding/decoding profile
Full command
PRELIMINARY

management commands
bridge port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set config [ingressfilter {on | off}]

[acceptableframetype {all | vlan-tagged}] [pvid vlan_id] [defaultpri {0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
6 | 7}] [regenerationpritable 0:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 1:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 2:{0 |
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 3:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 4:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 5:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 |
4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 6:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7} 7:{0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7}] [pcp {default | 5p3d |
8p0d | 7p1d | 6p2d }]
Syntax definitions

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
vlan_id
bridgeport_userlabel
TBS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
7-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
An integer value in the range 14094, indicating the VID, or the lower boundary of a
VLA ID range.
PRELIMINARY

management commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
To be supplied.
bridge port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show info

[vlan vlan_set]
Description
This command retrieves the following information:
The port status, default user PRI, for a MAC bridge
The port status (for a specified VLA set), default user PRI, regeneration user table,
PVID, acceptable frame type, and ingress filtering information for a Virtual/Provider
(etwork) bridge port
Syntax definitions

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
PRELIMINARY

vlan_set
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
7-12
are specified.
Example
PRELIMINARY

bridge port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show info
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
[vlan vlan_set]

management commands
The following example shows all information for a specific VLA (2000) on a specific
port (interface 2 of drawer 1 of the board in slot 6).
Cli:ADMIN > bridge port r1sr1s25d1p2 show info vlan 2000
Show Bridge Vlan Port Info r1sr1s25d1p2
----------------------------------------Vlan # 2000 - Bridge Vlan Port State: disabled (1)
PortDefaultUserPriority: 0
RegenUserPriority: 0
Pvid: 1
Port Acceptable Frame Types: admitAll (1)
Port Ingress Filtering: enabled (1)
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
7-13
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

management commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command applies only to a Provider Bridge. It associates a VLA protocol profile
with all Provider Bridge etwork ports in one shot.
Syntax definitions

Example
The following example shows the command for specific VLA protocol profile
(TEST0002), defined by the operator.
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlanprotprofile bind TEST0002
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlanprotprofile show
Index Vlan UserLabel
Vlan Ether Type Vlan Status
----- ---------------------------------- --------------- -----------1
'aa1;
0x9f8b
active (1)
2
'TEST0002'
0x8100
active (1)
bridge port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set

vlanprotprofile bind vlanprotprof_userlabel
Description
This command applies only to Provider Bridge. It associates a VLA protocol profile to
one or more Ethernet ports configured as ETB ports.
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
7-14

,naming_set#n] is an expression using integer values in the range 1 - 4094,
example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
PRELIMINARY

bridge port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vlanprotprofile bind vlanprotprof_userlabel

management commands
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18

Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command associates the default VLA protocol profile to all Provider Bridge
etwork ports, or a specified set of Provider Bridge I ports (ETB) that can be
specified in the optional parameter.
Syntax definitions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
7-15
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY

bridge vlanprotprofile default [port naming...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
_set_list_lagnumber_set]

management commands

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
Example
To be supplied.
bridge vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel

[type ethertype_value]
Description
This command activates the VLA protocol profile that is defined by the operator,
associated to the Provider Bridge etwork ports.
Syntax definitions

ethertype_value
PRELIMINARY

Example
The following example shows the command to activate a VLA protocol profile
(TEST0002) defined by the operator.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
7-16
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlanprotprofile activate TEST0002

PRELIMINARY

bridge vlanprotprofile activate vlanprotprof_userlabel
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
[type ethertype_value]

management commands
Description
This command deletes the VLA protocol profile that is defined by the operator,
associated with the Provider Bridge etwork ports.
Syntax definitions

Example
The following example shows the command to delete a VLA protocol profile
(TEST0002) defined by the operator.
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlanprotprofile delete TEST0002

Description
This command retrieves the VLA protocol profile associated with the Provider Bridge
etwork ports.
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
7-17
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

management commands

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
The following example shows the command to display information about all VLA
protocol profiles configured on the etwork Element.
Cli:ADMIN > bridge vlanprotprofile show
Index Vlan UserLabel
Flan Ether Type Vlan Status
----- ---------------------------------- --------------- -----------1
'aa1;
0x9f8b
active (1)
2
'TEST0002'
0x8100
active (1)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
7-18
PRELIMINARY
8thernet switch
E
management commands

Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to filtering database general parameters.
Contents
bridgedbfiltering agetime filterDbAgeTime_value
8-1
8-2
bridgedbfiltering vlan config vlan_set [learning {enable | disable}] [flooding

{enable | disable}]
8-3
8-3

Description
This command configures the filtering database aging time.

Syntax definitions
A value in the set [280sec (default), 70min, 210min, 14h, 56h], indicating the filtering
database Aging Time. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch
(TSS-320 and TSS-160), Release 3.1 User Provisioning Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
8-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
filterDbAgeTime_value
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
The following example contains two commands:
The first sets the Aging Time
The second displays the value that has been set for the Aging Time (in seconds)
Cli:ADMIN (bridgedbfiltering) > agetime 70min
Cli:ADMIN (bridgedbfiltering) > show agetime
Aging Time: 4200
Cli:ADMIN (bridgedbfiltering) >

Description
This command retrieves the filtering database aging time.

Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows the command to get the value of the Aging Time in
seconds.
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > bridgedbfiltering show agetime

Aging Time: 300
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
8-2
bridgedbfiltering vlan config vlan_set [learning {enable |

disable}] [flooding {enable | disable}]
Description
This command enables or disables filtering database learning and flooding on a per
VLA basis.
PRELIMINARY

bridgedbfiltering vlan config vlan_set [learning {enable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
| disable}] [flooding {enable | disable}]
Syntax definitions
vlan_set
are specified.
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command retrieves the filtering database information.

Syntax definitions
vlan_set
are specified.
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
8-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to filtering database entries management.
Contents
bridgedbfiltering delete mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id]
8-4
bridgedbfiltering activate mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id] [portout

naming_set_list_lagnumber_set]
8-5
8-7
bridgedbfiltering show unicast-static
8-8
8-9
8-10

Description
This command deletes:
The unicast static filtering entry
The multicast static filtering entry
If the VLA parameter is not specified, it refers to VID=1.

The inbound bridge port parameter is always zero (0), indicating all inbound ports of the
VLA.
PRELIMINARY
The delete operation applies to the Multicast Static or Unicast Static MIB tables,
depending on the entry being deleted.
It is possible to recognize the entry as Multicast or Unicast, by looking at the least
significant bit of the most significant byte of the MAC address. If it is 1 the entry is
multicast, otherwise it is Unicast.
If it is a unicast entry, the E tries to delete the entry from the static unicast entry table. If
the operation is rejected, the E tries to delete the entry in the dynamic unicast entry
table. If the operation is rejected, the entry has not been previously registered.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
8-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Syntax definitions
vlan_id
An integer value in the range 14094, indicating the VID, or the lower boundary of a
VLA ID range.
macAddr
PRELIMINARY
A MAC address hexadecimal colon-separated format:

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
Example
To be supplied.
bridgedbfiltering activate mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id]

[portout naming_set_list_lagnumber_set]
Description
This command creates a unicast/multicast static filtering entry in the Filtering Database
that includes the following items:
The set of allowed outbound bridge ports: The set of ports to which frames, received
from the inbound port and addressed to a specific VLA MAC address, are to be
forwarded. If no outbound port is specified, then the frame is forwarded to all ports of
that VLA.
VLA: If the VLA parameter is not specified, it refers to VID=1
Syntax definitions
macAddr
A MAC address in string hex colon-separated format:

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
vlan_id
VLA ID range).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
8-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY

bridgedbfiltering activate mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
[portout naming_set_list_lagnumber_set]

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
Example
The following example displays a command that activates the bridge filtering parameters
for a specific VLA (1), and configure it for a specific port (interface 1 or drawer 1 of the
board in slot 6) relevant to a MAC address:
Cli:ADMIN > bridgedbfiltering activate mac 00:32:96:00:01:01 vlan 1
portint r1sr1sl6d1p1
The following example displays a command that activates the bridge filtering parameters
for a specific VLA (1) it to a specific port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of the board in slot 6)
relevant to a different MAC address:
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > bridgedbfiltering activate mac 10:32:96:00:02:02 vlan 1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
8-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves the entries related to a unicast dynamic MAC address, registered
in the Filtering Database that match the selection criteria.
If a MAC is not specified, this command refers to any MAC unicast destination
address (both static and dynamic).
If the VLA parameter is not specified, this command refers to any VID.
If the port parameter is not specified, this command refers to any outbound port.
PRELIMINARY
Full command

bridgedbfiltering show unicast-dynamic mac macAddr [vlan vlan_id ] [portout
naming_set_list_lagnumber_set]
Syntax definitions
macAddr

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
vlan_id
VLA ID range).

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
8-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command retrieves the following information about the unicast static filtering entries
in filtering database:
The MAC Address

Inbound bridge port with either, all inbound ports or, a specific bridge port
The set of allowed outbound bridge ports the set of ports to which frames, received
from inbound port and addressed to a specific <[VLA], MAC address>, are to be
forwarded.
If the MAC address parameter is not specified, it refers to any unicast static MAC
address. If the VLA parameter is not specified, it refers to any VID.
Full command

bridgedbfiltering show unicast-static [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]
Syntax definitions
macAddr

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
vlan_id
PRELIMINARY
VLA ID range).
Example
The following example displays all parameters relevant to unicast-static configuration for
all VLAs and ports (in the example only one is shown).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
8-8

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cli:ADMIN > bridgedbfiltering show

Cli:ADMIN (bridgedbfiltering - show) > unicast-static
PRELIMINARY
Show Unicast Static Info MAC 00:32:96:00:01:01 vlan 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------------StaticUnicastAllowedToGoTo: r1sr1sl6d1p1-4
Static Unicast Status: permanent (3)
Cli:ADMIN (bridgedbfiltering - show) >

Description
This command retrieves the following information about the multicast static MAC
addresses registered in the filtering database:
The MAC Address
from an inbound port and addressed to a specific VLA or MAC address, are to be
forwarded.
If the MAC address parameter is not specified, it refers to any MAC static multicast static
address. If the VLA parameter is not specified, it refers to any VID.
Full command

bridgedbfiltering show multicast-static [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]
Syntax definitions
macAddr

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
vlan_id
VLA ID range).
The following example displays all parameters relevant to multicast-static configuration

for all VLAs and ports (in the example only one is shown).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
8-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Example
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cli:ADMIN > bridgedbfiltering show multicast-static

Show Multicast Static Info MAC 01:32:96:00:02:02 Vlan 1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------StaticMulticastStaticEgressPorts: r1sr1sl6d1p1
Static Multicast Status: permanent (3)
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
This command allows to get the following information about the multicast MAC
addresses registered dynamically by a Group Address Registration Protocol in the
filtering database:
The MAC Address

from an inbound port, and addressed to a specific VLA or MAC address, are to be
forwarded
If MAC address parameter is not specified, it refers to any MAC dynamic multicast static
address. If VLA parameter is not specified, it refers to any VID.
Full command

bridgedbfiltering show multicast-dynamic [mac macAddr] [vlan vlan_id]
Syntax definitions
vlan_id
VLA ID range).
macAddr
PRELIMINARY
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
Example
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
8-10
PRELIMINARY
S9panning Tree Protocol

management commands
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to Spanning Tree Protocol management.
Contents
9-2
stp disable
9-3
stp show type
9-3
stp config
9-4
stp show info [vlan vlan_set]
9-6
stp port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set config
9-7
stp port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show info [vlan vlan_set]
9-9
9-11
mstp show region
9-12
mstp cist config
9-13
mstp cist show info
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-16
9-17
9-19
mstp show msti [vlan vlan_set]
9-19
9-20
9-21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
mstp region
PRELIMINARY
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
9-23
9-24
9-26

Description
This command enables a Spanning Tree Protocol type per node.

Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following 2 examples show how to enable STP.
The first shows STP enabled as STP type and the command that shows the type of
STP provided for the node.
The second shows STP enabled as RSTP type.
Cli:ADMIN > stp enable stp
Cli:ADMIN > stp show type
STP Type: stp (2)
Cli:ADMIN > stp enable rstp

PRELIMINARY

STP Type: rstp (3)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-2
stp disable
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
stp disable
Description
This command disables the currently active Spanning Tree Protocol per node.
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
/A
Example
The following two examples show how STP is disabled, and how the STP status of the
node is displayed.
Cli:ADMIN > stp disable
STP Type: manual disable (1)
stp show type

Description
This command displays the type of Spanning Tree Protocol that is active per node.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows information about the STP type provided on the node:
STP Type: rstp (3)
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
stp config
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
stp config
Description
This command changes the Spanning Tree Protocol information per node for the
following items:
Bridge Identifier Priority

Bridge Max Age
Bridge Hello Time
When an optional value is absent, the corresponding currently configured value is not
changed.
This command does not apply to MSTP. When this command is entered, the E has to
retrieve the currently configured opticsimSTPType and, if the checks above are not
verified, to reject the command informing significantly the user. This policy is valid for
all commands in the stp context.
Full command

stp config [vlan vlan_set] [pri bridge_pri] [maxage bridge_max_age] [hellotime
bridge_hello_time] [fwddelay bridge_forward_delay]
Syntax definitions
vlan_set
are specified.
bridge_pri
the writable portion of the bridge identifier (the first 2 byte of 8 byte). It is an integer
value in the range 061440, at increments of 4096. The default value is 32768.
bridge_max_age
PRELIMINARY
The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root
Bridge. It is an integer value, measured in 0.01 seconds, in the range 6004000. The
default value is 2000.
bridge_hello_time
The interval between periodic transmissions of the Configuration Message by

Designated Ports. It is an integer value, measured in 0.01 seconds, in the range
100200. The default value is 200.
bridge_forward_delay
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-4
stp config
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Bridge Forward Delay is used by STP to transition Root and Designated Ports to
Forwarding. It is an integer value, measured in 0.01 seconds, in the range 4003000.
The default value is 1500.
Example
The following examples show STP configuration (all parameters except VLA
parameter), and the command that displays all information for the STP provisioned for
the node.
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > stp config pri 24576 maxage 1500 hellotime 200 fwddelay
1000
Cli:ADMIN > stp show info
Show Info of STP 0
-------------------Stp Priority: 24576
Stp BridgeAddress: 00:20:60:2C:7C:00 (prty 6291456)
Stp TimeSinceTopologyChange: 0 days, 0:00:00 (hr:min:sec)
Stp TopChanges: 0
Stp DesignatedRoot: 00:00:00:00:00:00 (prty 0)
Stp RootCost: 0
Stp RootPortNumber: 0
Stp MaxAge: 2000
Stp Hellotime: 200
Stp ForwardDelay: 1500
Stp BridgeMaxAge: 1500
Stp BridgeHelloTime: 200
Stp BridgeForwardDelay: 1000
Stp NextBestRootCost: 0
Stp NextBestRootPortNumber: 0
Stp TxHoldCount: 6
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves the following Spanning Tree Protocol information per node.
For RSTP:
Bridge Identifier
Time Since Topology Change the time since the last topology change that was
detected by the Spanning Tree Protocol
Topology Change Count the total number of topology changes detected by this
bridge since reset or initialization
Designated Root the Bridge Identifier of the root for the spanning tree as
determined by the protocol on this bridge. This value is used as the Root Identifier
parameter in all Configuration BPDUs originated by this node.
Root Path Cost
Root Port
Max Age
Hello Time
Bridge Max Age
Bridge Hello Time

ext Best Root Cost the cost of the path to the root through the next best root port
on this bridge
ext Best Root Port umber the port number of the next port which provides the
lowest cost path from this bridge to the root bridge. This port will become root port if
the actual root port goes down.
Transmit Hold Count
Syntax definitions
vlan_set
PRELIMINARY
are specified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
In the following example are shown information about STP provided for the node:
Cli:ADMIN > stp show info
Show Info of STP 0
-------------------Stp Priority: 32768
Stp BridgeAddress: 00:20:60:2C:7C:00: (prty 8388608)
Stp TopChanges: 0
Stp RootCost: 0
Stp MaxAge: 2000
Stp HelloTime: 200
Stp TxHoldCount: 6
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
This command changes the following Spanning Tree Protocol information per port.
For RSTP:
Port Identifier Priority

Port Path Cost
Force Port State

Administrative Connection Type
When an optional value is absent, the currently configured value is not changed.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Full command

stp port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set config [vlan vlan_set] [pri port_pri]
[pathcost port_path_cost] [forcestate {dynamic | blocked | forwarding}]
[adminxctype {edge | ptp | noptp | auto}]
Syntax definitions

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
vlan_set
For instance, 100-103&2555 means that the VLA values 100, 101, 102, 103 and
2555 are specified.
PRELIMINARY
port_pri
The writable portion of the port identifier (the first 4 bits of the 2 bytes). An integer
value in the range 0240 at increments of 16 and a default value of 128.
port_path_cost
The port path cost. Its value depends on the link speed of the port (e.g. if the link speed
of the port is Mbit/s, the port_path_cost is an integer value in the range 1200000000.
The default value is 20,000,000.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
The following two examples show STP configuration:
The first shows STP configuration (except VLA parameter) for a specific port
(interface 1 of drawer 1 of the board in slot 6), where the PRI value is set to 3.
The second shows STP configuration (except VLA parameter) for a specific port
(interface 1 of drawer 1 of the board in slot 6), where the PRI value is set to 0.
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > stp port r1sr1sl6d1p1 config pri 3 pathcost 19

forcestate forwarding adminxctype ptp
>> warning: rounded off priority value
Cli:ADMIN >
Cli:ADMIN > stp port r1sr1sl6d1p1 config pri 0 pathcost 19

forcestate forwarding adminxctype ptp
stp port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show info [vlan

vlan_set]
Description
This command retrieves the following Spanning Tree Protocol information per port:
Port State the current control plane state of the port. The possible values are:
disabled, learning and forwarding.
Port Identifier the unique Port Identifier consisting of Port umber and Port
Priority
Port Role
Port Path Cost
Port Designated Bridge the Bridge Identifier of the bridge, which this port
considers to be the Designated Bridge for this segment.
Port Designated Port Identifier the Port Identifier of the port on the Designated
Bridge for this segment.
Port Forward Transitions the number of times the control plane state of this port
has changed from learning to forwarding state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Port Designated Root the unique Bridge Identifier, in the Configuration BPDUs,
for the Bridge recorded as the Root, transmitted by the Designated Bridge for the
segment to which the port is attached.
Port Designated Cost the path cost of the Designated Port for the segment
connected to this port
PRELIMINARY
stp port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show info

[vlan vlan_set]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Force Port State the force control plane port state in charge of disabling or
enabling Spanning Tree Protocol for a specific port. If it is enabled for a specific port,
the control plane port state is set by the protocol. If it is disabled, the control plane
port state can be set by the manager. The possible values for this are: dynamic,
blocked, and forwarding.
AdminConnectionType the connection type of administrative port. The possible
values for this are: edge port, point-to-point, not-point-to-point, or automatically
determined by bridge.
OperConnectionType the connection type of the operational port. The possible
values for this are the same as for AdminConnectionType.
Syntax definitions

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
vlan_set
PRELIMINARY
For instance, 100-103&2555 means that the VLA values 100, 101, 102, 103 and
2555 are specified.
Example
The following example shows information about STP for the node related to a specific
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-10
stp port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show info

[vlan vlan_set]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cli:ADMIN > stp port r1sr1sl6d1p1 show info

Show Info of Stp Port 0 Port r1sr1sl6d1p1
------------------------------------------STP Port State Force: forwarding (4)
Stp Port State: forwarding (5)
Stp Port Priority: 0
Stp Port Role: disabled (5)
Stp Port PathCost: 19
Designated Root: 00:00:00:00:00:00 (prty 0)
Designated Cost: 0
Designated Bridge: 00:00:00:00:00:00 (prty 0)
Designated Pt Number :0
Designated Pt Prio: 0
Forward Transitions: 0
Admin Connection Type: pointtopoint (2)
Oper Connection Type: nonsignificant (3)
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN >
mstp region
Description
This command changes the following MSTP information per node:
Region name
Revision level
When information for an optional value is absent, the currently configured value is not
changed.
When these parameters are not set the E automatically sets the Region ame to the
Bridge Address as a text string using the hexadecimal representation, and the Revision
Level to zero (0).
Full command

mstp region [name region_ userlabel] [revisionlevel region_revision_level]
Syntax definitions
An octet string representing the name of an MSTP region

region_revision_level
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
region_userlabel
PRELIMINARY
mstp region
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The MSTP region revison level

An integer value in the range 0-65535
Example
To be supplied.
mstp show region

Description
This command retrieves the following MSTP region information per node:
Formal selector: The value 0 indicates that the components are coded as specified in
the 802.1 standard
Configuration Digest: The MST Region identifier (16 octets) as defined by the 802.1
standard
Configuration ame
Revision Level
MSTI list: A list of MST instances configured in this region
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
Cli:ADMIN > mstp show region
PRELIMINARY
Show Info of Region

--------------------Region Format Selector: 0
Region Digest: AC36177F50283CD4B83821D8AB26DE62
Region Name: 'Reg001'
Region Revision Level: 0
Region MSTI List: 0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-12
mstp cist config
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mstp cist config

Description
This command changes the following CIST information per node:
Bridge Identifier Priority
Bridge Max Age

Bridge Hello Time
PRELIMINARY
When an value is absent, the currently configured value is not changed.

When porttype = auto, then: vStpPortAdminEdge= false, vStpPortAutoEdge = true.
When porttype = edge, then: vStpPortAdminEdge= true, vStpPortAutoEdge = false.
When porttype = noedge, then: vStpPortAdminEdge= false, vStpPortAutoEdge = false.
When restricted = role, then: vStpPortRestrictedRole = true, vStpPortRestrictedTcn =
false.
When restricted = tcn, then: vStpPortRestrictedRole = false, vStpPortRestrictedTcn =
true.
When restricted = both, then: vStpPortRestrictedRole = true, vStpPortRestrictedTcn =
true.
When restricted = none, then: vStpPortRestrictedRole = false, vStpPortRestrictedTcn =
false.
Full command

mstp cist config [pri bridge_pri] [maxage bridge_max_age] [hellotime
bridge_hello_time]
Syntax definitions
bridge_pri
The writable portion of the bridge identifier (the first 2 of 8 bytes). This is an integer
value in the range 061440 in increments of 4096 and with a default value of 32768.
bridge_max_age
bridge_hello_time
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-13
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root
Bridge. This is an integer value, measured in 0.01 seconds, in the range 6004000 with
a default value of 2000.
PRELIMINARY
mstp cist config
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The interval between periodic transmissions of Configuration Message by Designated

Ports. This is an integer value, measured in 0.01 seconds, in the range 100200 with a
default value of 200.
Example
To be supplied.
mstp cist show info

Description
This command retrieves the following CIST information per node:
Bridge Identifier
Time Since Topology Change
Topology Change Count
Designated Root
Root Path Cost
Root Port
Max Age
Hello Time
Bridge Max Age
Bridge Hello Time
ext Best Root Cost

ext Best Root Port umber
Transmit Hold Count

CIST Regional Root ID
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
PRELIMINARY
The following example shows information about MSTP CIST for the node:
Cli:ADMIN > mstp cist show info
Show Info of Mstp 0
--------------------Stp Priority: 32768
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-14
mstp cist show info
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stp
Stp
Stp
Stp
Stp
Stp
Stp
Stp
Stp
Stp
Stp
TopChanges: 0
DesignatedRoot: 00:00:00:00:00:00 (prty 0)
RootCost: 0
RootPortNumber: 0
MaxAge: 2000
HelloTime: 200
BridgeMaxAge: 2000
BridgeHelloTime: 200
NextBestRootCost: 0
NextBestRootPortNumber: 0
TxHoldCount: 6
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
This command creates an MSTI.

Syntax definitions
mstp_instance_set
representing a set of MSTP instance value ranges. For example, 1-3&21 means that the
values 1, 2, 3 and 21 are specified.
Example
The following example shows the command used to create an MSTI, with a specific
range:
Cli:ADMIN > mstp msti 10-15&17-20 activate
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-15
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command deletes an MSTI.

Syntax definitions
mstp_instance_set
Example
The following example shows the command to delete a specific MSTI:

Cli:ADMIN > mstp msti 10-15&17-20 delete
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
This command changes the Bridge Identifier Priority of an MSTI instance on a node
when the STPType is MSTP.
Syntax definitions
mstp_instance_set
representing a set of MSTP value ranges. For example 1-3&21 means that the values
1, 2, 3 and 21 are specified.
bridge_pri
PRELIMINARY
Writable portion of the bridge identifier (the first 2 of 8 bytes). This is an integer value
in the range 061440 in increments of 4096. The default value is 32768.
Example
The following example shows the command to configure an MSTI, with a specific range
and bridge priority (PRI).
Cli:ADMIN > mstp msti 10-15&17-20 config pri 24576
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
PRELIMINARY
This command displays the following MSTI information per node:
Bridge Identifier
Time Since Topology Change
Topology Change Count

Designated Root
Root Path Cost

Root Port
Syntax definitions
mstp_instance_set
Example
The following example shows information about MSTP MSTI for a specific range. Three
of the ten items in this range are shown; mstp 10, mstp 11, and mstp 20.
Cli:ADMIN > mstp msti 10-15&17-20 show info
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-17
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Show Info of Mstp 10

--------------------Stp Priority: 24586
Stp TopChanges: 0
Stp RootCost: 0
Stp MaxAge: 2000
Stp HelloTime: 200
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stp TxHoldCount: 6
--------------------Stp Priority: 24587
Stp TopChanges: 0
Stp RootCost: 0
Stp MaxAge: 2000
Stp HelloTime: 200
Stp TxHoldCount: 6
PRELIMINARY

--------------------Stp Priority: 24596
Stp TopChanges: 0
Stp RootCost: 0
Stp MaxAge: 2000
Stp HelloTime: 200
Stp TxHoldCount: 6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command changes the MSTID assigned to one or more specific VIDs. By default, all
VIDs are allocated to CIST (MSTID = 0). This command is valid only for IVL Bridge.
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
mstp_instance
The MSTP instance identifier. An integer value in the range 163.

vlan_set
For example, 100-103&2555 means that the VLA values 100, 101, 102, 103 and
2555 are specified.
Example
The following example shows the command to change a specific VLA identification for
a specific MSTI (12).
Cli:ADMIN > mstp msti 12 vlan 2-5&10
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
This command retrieves the MSTID assigned to each VLA that has been created. This
command can be targeted to a specific VID.
Syntax definitions
vlan_set
For example, 100-103&2555 means that the VLA values 100, 101, 102, 103 and
2555 are specified.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-19
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
The following example shows information about MSTP MSTI for to a specific range of
VLAs.
Cli:ADMIN > mstp show msti vlan 2-5&10
vlan 2 - Assignment Mstp Number: 12
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
This command displays the VLAs to which the created MSTIs are assigned. This
command can be targeted to a specific MSTI.
Syntax definitions
mstp_instance_set
Example
PRELIMINARY
In the following two examples:
The first example shows information about MSTP MSTIs configured for all VLAs.
The second example shows information for the specified MSTP MSTI range.
Cli:ADMIN > mstp show vlan
msti 0 - Vlan List: 1&6-9&11-4094
msti 10 - Vlan List:
msti 12 - Vlan List: 2-5&10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-20
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cli:ADMIN >
Cli:ADMIN
msti 10 msti 11 msti 12 msti 13 msti 14 msti 15 msti 17 msti 18 msti 19 msti 20 Cli:ADMIN
> mstp show vlan msti 10-15&17-20

Vlan List:
Vlan List:
Vlan List: 2-5&10
Vlan List:
Vlan List:
Vlan List:
Vlan List:
Vlan List:
Vlan List:
Vlan List:
>
PRELIMINARY

Description
This command changes the following CIST information for a port:
Force Port State

Internal Root Port Path Cost

External Root Port Path Cost
When an value is absent, the currently configured value is not changed.

Full command

mstp cist port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set config [forcestate {dynamic |
blocked | forwarding}] [adminxctype {edge | ptp | noptp | auto}] [pri port_pri]
[pathcost port_path_cost] [extpathcost port_path_cost]
Syntax definitions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-21
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
A lagnumber_set is an expression using integer values (1124), ampersand (&) and
lag4-7&18
port_pri
The writable portion of the port identifier (the first 4 bits of 2 bytes). It is an integer
value in the range 0240, in increments of 16. The default value is 128.
port_path_cost
The port path cost value depends on the link speed of the port. port_path_cost is
an integer value in the range 1200000000. The default value is 20,000,000.
Example
The following example shows the command to change several CIST parameters for a
specific port.
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > mstp cist port r1sr1sl6d1p1, r1sr1sl25d1p2 config

forcestate blocked adminxcty edge pri 3 pathcost 22
Cli:ADMIN (mstp - cist - port)>
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-22
mstp cist port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show

info
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves the following CIST information for a port:
CIST Port State: the current control plane state of the port. The possible values are:
CIST Port Identifier: the unique Port Identifier consisting of Port umber and Port
Priority.
CIST Port Role
CIST Internal Port Path Cost

CIST External Port Path Cost
CIST Port Designated Root
CIST Port Designated Cost

CIST Port Designated Bridge
CIST Port Designated Port Identifier

Operational Connection Type
CIST Port Hello Time

CIST Port Bridge Hello Time
Force Port State
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-23
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
mstp cist port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show

info
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
The following example shows information about MSTP CIST for a specific port
(interface 1 of drawer 1 of the board in slot 6).
Cli:ADMIN > mstp cist port r1sr1sl6d1p1, r1sr1sl6d1p2 show info
Cli:ADMIN (mstp - cist - port) > show info
Show Info of Mstp 0 Port r1sr1sl6d1p1
--------------------------------------Stp Port State Force: dynamic (1)
Stp Port State: disabled (1)
Designated Cost: 0
Designated Pt Number: 0
Admin Connection Type: pointtopoint (2)
Oper Connection Type: nonsignificant (3)
Bridge Hello Time: 200

Description
This command changes the following MSTI information for a port:
PRELIMINARY

Port Path Cost
When an optional value is absent, the corresponding currently configured value is not
changed.
Full command

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-24
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mstp msti mstp_instance_set port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set config [pri

port_pri] [pathcost port_path_cost]
Syntax definitions
mstp_instance_set
This is an expression using integer values in the range 163, and specific symbols for
representing a set of MSTP ranges. For example, 1-3&21 means that the values 1, 2, 3
and 21 are specified.
PRELIMINARY

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
port_pri
This is the writable portion of the port identifier (the first 4 bits of 2 bytes). It is an
integer value in the range 0240, in increments of 16. The default value is 128.
port_path_cost
The port path cost value depends on the link speed of the port. port_path_cost is
an integer value in the range 1200000000. The default value is 20,000,000.
The following example displays the command to change several MSTI parameters for a
specific port:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-25
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Example
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cli:ADMIN > mstp msti 10-15&17-20 port r1sr1sl6d1p1-2 config pri 3

pathcost 19
Cli:ADMIN (mstp - msti - port) >

Description
This command retrieves the following MSTI information for MSTI, identified by
MSTID, on a port.
MSTI Force Port State.

MSTI Port State: the current control plane state of the port. The possible values are:
MSTI Port Identifier: the unique Port Identifier consisting of Port umber and Port
Priority.
MSTI Port Role
MSTI Port Path Cost
MSTI Port Designated Root

MSTI Port Designated Cost
MSTI Port Designated Bridge

MSTI Port Designated Port Identifier
Full command

mstp msti mstp_instance_set port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show info
Syntax definitions
mstp_instance_set
This is an expression using integer values in the range 163, and specific symbols for
representing a set of MSTP ranges. For example, 1-3&21 means that the values 1, 2, 3
and 21 are specified.
PRELIMINARY

example:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-26
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
PRELIMINARY
lag4-7&18
Example
The following example displays information about MSTP MSTI configured on a specific
Cli:ADMIN > mstp msti 10-15&17-20 r1sr1sl6d1p1 show info
---------------------------------------Stp Port State Force: dynamic (1)
Designated Cost: 0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
9-27
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

---------------------------------------Stp Port State Force: dynamic (1)
Designated Cost: 0
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
9-28
PRELIMINARY
10
10 aggregation
Link
management commands
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to Link aggregation management.

Contents
linkagg activate
10-2
linkagg config
10-3
linkagg config neprio ne_pri
10-5
10-5
10-6
linkagg port naming_set_list bind lagnumber [pri port_lnkaggpri]
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-8
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
10-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
linkagg activate
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
linkagg activate
Description
This command creates and activates a Link Aggregation Group.

If a parameter is not specified in the command, the E sets it to its default value. For
additional information about default values, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport
Service Switch (TSS-320 and TSS-160), Release 3.1 User Provisioning Guide.
Full command

linkagg activate lagnumber adminkey adminkey_value [ets | bridge] [size
lagsize_value] [vlanprotprof vlanprotprof_userlabel] [floodinglimit
floodinglimit_value] [asap asap_userlabel] [lagname lag_userlabel]
[neprio ne_pri]
[trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [asap asap_userlabel] [lagname lag_userlabel]
[neprio ne_pri] [hashingkey hash_mask_id] [lacp {enable | disable}] [maxmtu
mtu_value]
Syntax definitions
lagnumber
A string in the format, lagN, where N is an integer value in the range 1-24.
For example: lag18
adminkey_value
An integer value in the range 1124.

lagsize_value


asap_userlabel

lag_userlabel
PRELIMINARY

ne_pri
An integer value in the range 065535, indicating the priority value associated with the
E.
hash_mask_id
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
10-2
linkagg activate
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Allowed combinations of Hashing key parameters, as input to Link Aggregation Hash

function:
0 (Default) Mask0 <MAC Destination Address (DA), MAC Source Address

(SA)>
1 Mask1 <MAC DA, MAC SA> + up to 3 MPLS Labels
2 Mask2 [<MAC DA, MAC SA> + up to 3 MPLS Labels] + <Inner VID, outer
VID>
3 Mask3 [<MAC DA, MAC SA> + up to 3 MPLS Labels + <Inner VID, outer
PRELIMINARY
mtu_value
Example
To be supplied.
linkagg config
Description
This command enables or disables LACP for a Link Aggregation Group, or changes all
parameters of an active Link Aggregation Group.
Full command

linkagg config lagnumber [ets | bridge] [size lagsize_value] [vlanprotprof
vlanprotprof_userlabel] [trafficstatus {enable | disable}] [floodinglimit
floodinglimit_value] [asap asap_userlabel] [lagname lag_userlabel]
[adminstate {enable | disable}] [hashingkey hash_mask_id] [lacp {enable | disable}]
[maxmtu mtu_value]
lagnumber
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
10-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
linkagg config
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A string in the format, lagN, where N is an integer value in the range 1-24.
For example: lag18
lagsize_value


floodinglimit_value
The ingress port admitted flooding rate expressed in kbit/s. Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent
1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and TSS-160), Release 3.1 User Provisioning
Guide.
asap_userlabel

lag_userlabel

hash_mask_id
Allowed combinations of Hashing key parameters, as input to Link Aggregation Hash

function:
0 (Default) Mask0 <MAC Destination Address (DA), MAC Source Address

(SA)>
1 Mask1 <MAC DA, MAC SA> + up to 3 MPLS Labels
2 Mask2 [<MAC DA, MAC SA> + up to 3 MPLS Labels] + <Inner VID, outer
VID>
mtu_value
PRELIMINARY
Example
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
10-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command changes the E priority for all Link aggregation Groups defined on the
E.
The CLI code selects one of the configured LAGs and sets the E priority attribute for
this LAG. The E is responsible for propagating this information on all LAGs configured
on the E.
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions
ne_pri
An integer value in the range 065535, indicating the priority value associated with the
E.
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command deactivates and deletes a Link Aggregation Group.

Syntax definitions
lagnumber_set
An expression, lagN, where N can be integer values in the range 1-124, with optional
ampersand (&) and dash (-) symbols for representing a set of LAG instance value
ranges.
For example, lag4-7&18 means that the values 4, 5, 6, 7 and 18 are specified.
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
10-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves a list of all the configured link aggregation groups with user label
and administrative key information. It also shows the component LAG ports.
This command also retrieves detailed information about a specific Link Aggregation
Group, including a list of its component ports, by specifying the corresponding LAG
number.
Syntax definitions
lagnumber_set
An expression, lagN, where N can be integer values in the range 1-124, with optional
ampersand (&) and dash (-) symbols for representing a set of LAG instance value
ranges.
For example, lag4-7&18 means that the values 4, 5, 6, 7 and 18 are specified.
Example
To be supplied.
linkagg port naming_set_list bind lagnumber [pri

port_lnkaggpri]
Description
This command binds local Ethernet ports to a LAG. If port priority is not specified, it is
set to the default value (0x80).
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

PRELIMINARY
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
means that the ports 1, 2 and 3 of the boards in slots 3, 4, 5, 6 and 18 are
specified
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
10-6
linkagg port naming_set_list bind lagnumber [pri

port_lnkaggpri]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lagnumber
An expression, lagN, where N is an integer value in the range 1124, indicating the
For example: lag18
port_lnkaggpri
PRELIMINARY
Link Aggregation port priority (2 bytes). An integer value in the range 0255, with
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command configures the port priority of Aggregation ports.

Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
specified
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
port_lnkaggpri
Link Aggregation port priority (2 bytes). An integer value in the range 0255, with
Example
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
10-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command unbinds a local Ethernet port from a LAG.

Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
specified
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command retrieves information about the aggregation ports in a LAG including
information about the LAG to which the port belongs.
If any port provided in the command is not a LAG component port, the CLI displays its
port index with the indication that it does not belong to a LAG.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list
PRELIMINARY

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
specified
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
10-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
10-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
11
11 segregation
Port
management commands
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to port segregation management.

Contents
portseg activate [seg portseg_id] [port naming_set_list_lagnumber_
set]
11-1
portseg add [seg portseg_id] port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5

Description
This command creates and activates the Port Segregation set by configuring the member
ports.
Syntax definitions
An integer value indicating Port Segregation identifier in the range of 115. The
default value is 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
11-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
portseg_id
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
Example
To be supplied.
portseg add [seg portseg_id] port naming_set_list_lagnumber_set

Description
This command adds ports to the Port Segregation set.

Syntax definitions
portseg_id
PRELIMINARY
default value is 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
11-2
portseg add [seg portseg_id] port naming_set_list_la-
gnumber_set
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
PRELIMINARY
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command removes ports from the Port Segregation set.

Syntax definitions
portseg_id
default value is 1.

example:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
11-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

PRELIMINARY
portseg remove [seg portseg_id] port naming-
_set_list_lagnumber_set
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command deletes the Port Segregation set.

Syntax definitions
portseg_set
An integer expression using values in the range 1-15, and specific symbols
for representing a Port Segregation set . For example, 1-2&12 means that the
Port Segregation values 1, 2, and 12 are specified. The default value is 1.
Example
PRELIMINARY
the first deletes the Port Segregation set.

the second shows the response to a portseg show info command after the
deletion.
Cli:ADMIN > portseg delete
-- message: successful completed command !!
Cli:ADMIN > portseg show info

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
11-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
>> error: not activated the Port Segregation Set

Description
PRELIMINARY
This command displays the port list of the Port Segregation set.
Syntax definitions
portseg_set
An integer expression using values in the range 1-15, and specific symbols
for representing a Port Segregation set . For example, 1-2&12 means that the
Port Segregation values 1, 2, and 12 are specified. The default value is 1.
Example
The following example displays the information for the Port Segregation set.
Cli:ADMIN > portseg show info
Show Segregation Set Ports
----------------------------segregatedPortSetPorts:
Status: active (1)
Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
11-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
12
Ethernet Link OAM

12
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to Ethernet Link OAM.

Contents
12-2
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-4
linkoam position naming_set_list remoteloopback {enable | disable}
12-5
12-5
12-6
12-7
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
12-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Ethernet Link OAM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command enables or disables Ethernet Link OAM on an interface.

Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command configures Ethernet Link OAM parameters on a per interface basis.
Full command

linkoam position naming_set_list config [linkoam_tx linkoam_tx_interval]
[l2cp_rx_frame {drop | pass}] [linkoam_max_symberror linkoam_max_symbolerrors]
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
naming_set_list

example:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
12-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
linkoam_tx_interval
PRELIMINARY
Ethernet Link OAM
An integer value in terms of 100 ms between two consecutive Information

OAMPDUs.
linkoam_max_symbolerrors
An integer value indicating the threshold for the number of Symbol Errors in one
second that trigger a Link Fail flag in OAMPDUs.
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command displays Ethernet Link OAM parameters on the local Ethernet interface.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
12-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
Ethernet Link OAM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command displays Ethernet Link OAM parameters for the local Ethernet interface of
peer Ethernet.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command displays Ethernet Link OAM statistics on the local Ethernet interface.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

example:
PRELIMINARY
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
12-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
To be supplied.
linkoam position naming_set_list remoteloopback {enable

| disable}
PRELIMINARY
Ethernet Link OAM
Description
This command enables or disables a remote loopback on the local Ethernet interface.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command configures the following for an Errored Symbol Period Event, Errored
Frame Event, Errored Frame Period Event, and Errored Frame seconds Summary Event.
Enable or disable Event otification
Event Monitoring Window

Event Threshold
Full command

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
12-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Ethernet Link OAM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
{errsymperiod | errframe | errframeperiod | errframesecs} [{enable | disable}] [window

linkoam_window] [threshold linkoam_threshold]
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
linkoam_window
The number of frames over which the threshold is defined.

linkoam_threshold
An integer value with the number of frame errors that must occur for this event to be
triggered
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command retrieves the following information for an Errored Symbol Period Event,
Errored Frame Event, Errored Frame Period Event, and Errored Frame seconds Summary
Event.
PRELIMINARY
Enabled or disabled status for Event otification

Event Monitoring Window
Event Threshold
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
12-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
PRELIMINARY
Ethernet Link OAM
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command displays the log of events related to Errored Symbol Period Event, Errored
Frame Event, Errored Frame Period Event, and Errored Frame seconds Summary Event.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
12-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
13
Ethernet OAM
13
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to Ethernet OAM.

Contents
ethoam activate md_userlabel [level md_level] [md_mip_creation {none |
explicit | implicit}]
13-2
ethoam config md_userlabel [level md_level] [md_mip_creation {none |

explicit | implicit}]
13-2
13-3
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-5
13-6
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel add remote-mepid mep_set
13-6
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel remove remote-mepid
13-7
mep_set
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id activate port
13-8
ethoam md md_ userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id config port
13-9
13-10
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id show
13-11
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id loopback remote

{macAddr | mep_id} [pri pri]
13-12
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id loopback show
13-13
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
13-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id delete
PRELIMINARY
Overview
Ethernet OAM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id linktrace remote

{macAddr | mep_id} [ttl ttl_value]
13-13
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id linktrace show
13-14
13-15
ethoam etype show
13-15
ethoam activate md_userlabel [level md_level]

[md_mip_creation {none | explicit | implicit}]
Description
This command creates a Maintenance Domain (MD) inside Ethernet OAM by setting the
MD name, MD level, and MIP Creation status (enabled or disabled). The default MD
level is 4.
Syntax definitions
md_userlabel
An Octet String Integer identifying a Maintenance Domain. The combined length of

md_level
An integer in the range 0 to 7, identifying the Maintenance Domain Level.

Example
To be supplied.
ethoam config md_userlabel [level md_level]

Description
PRELIMINARY
This command changes the Maintenance Domain (MD) parameters (the MD level and
MIP Creation status).
Syntax definitions
md_userlabel

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
13-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
md_level
An integer in the range 0 to 7, identifying the Maintenance Domain Level.

Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
ethoam config md_userlabel [level md_level]

Ethernet OAM

Description
This command deletes a Maintenance Domain.

Syntax definitions
md_userlabel

Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command displays a Maintenance Domain.

Syntax definitions
md_userlabel

Example
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
13-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
Ethernet OAM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command creates a Maintenance Association inside a Maintenance Domain by

setting the MA ame, automatic MIP creation, and associated VLA value.
Full command

ethoam md md_userlabel activate ma_userlabel
[vlan vlan_id]
[ccmInterval { 3ms | 10ms | 100ms | 1 sec | 10 sec | 1min | 10 min}]
[ma_mip_creation {none | explicit | implicit}]
Syntax definitions
md_userlabel

ma_userlabel
An Octet String that identifies a Maintenance Association. The combined length of

vlan_id
An integer value in the range 1 to 4094 indicating the VID, or the lower boundary of a
VLA ID range.
Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
13-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command configures a Maintenance Association inside a Maintenance Domain by

setting the MA ame, automatic MIP creation, and associated VLA value.
Full command
PRELIMINARY
Ethernet OAM

ethoam md md_userlabel config ma_userlabel [vlan vlan_id] [ccmInterval { 3ms
| 10ms | 100ms | 1 sec | 10 sec | 1min | 10 min}] [ma_mip_creation {none | explicit |
implicit}]
Syntax definitions
md_userlabel

ma_userlabel

vlan_id
An integer value in the range 1 to 4094 indicating the VID, or the lower boundary of a
VLA ID range.
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command deletes a Maintenance Association inside a Maintenance Domain.

Syntax definitions

MD and MA userlabels cannot exceed 48 bytes.
ma_userlabel
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
13-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
md_userlabel
PRELIMINARY
Ethernet OAM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command displays a Maintenance Association.

Syntax definitions
md_userlabel

ma_userlabel

Example
To be supplied.
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel add

remote-mepid mep_set
Description
This command adds a MEP, or a list of MEPs, to MEP list entry.

Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
md_userlabel

ma_userlabel

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
13-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mep_set
An integer expression in the range 18191, and specific symbols for representing a set
of MEPID ranges. For instance 1-3&21 means that the values 1,2,3,21 are specified
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel add

Ethernet OAM
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel remove

Description
This command deletes a MEP, or a list of MEPs, from MEP list entry.
Syntax definitions
md_userlabel

ma_userlabel

mep_set
An integer expression in the range 18191, and specific symbols for representing a set
of MEPID ranges. For instance 1-3&21 means that the values 1,2,3,21 are specified
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
13-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id

activate port
Ethernet OAM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

activate port
Description
This command creates a MEP inside a Maintenance Association and sets the MEP
parameters.
The successful completion of this command also updates the MEP List Table by adding
the newly provisioned MEP.
Full command

ethoam md md_userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id activate port {naming |
lagnumber} direction {up | down} [mep_cc {enable | disable}] [ccmLtmPriority pri]
Syntax definitions
md_userlabel
An Octet String Integer identifying a Maintenance Domain. The combined length of MD

and MA userlabels cannot exceed 48 bytes.
ma_userlabel
An Octet String that identifies a Maintenance Association. The combined length of MD

mep_id
An Integer in the range 18191, identifying a Maintenance association End Point Identifier
(MEPID). It is unique for a given Maintenance Association.
naming
PRELIMINARY
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
For commands that apply to a board, the naming must have rack, subrack, board0, and
drawer=port=0. For commands that apply to a port, the naming must have rack, subrack,
board, and port0.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
13-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lagnumber
For example: lag18
pri
PRELIMINARY

activate port
Ethernet OAM
An integer value in the range 07, indicating the Priority, or the lower boundary of a PRI
range.
Example
To be supplied.
ethoam md md_ userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id

config port
Description
This command changes MEP parameters.

Full command

ethoam md md_ userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep mep_id config [port {naming |
lagnumber}] [mep_cc {enable | disable}][ ccmLtmPriority pri]
Syntax definitions
md_userlabel

ma_userlabel

mep_id
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
13-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
naming
PRELIMINARY
ethoam md md_ userlabel ma ma_userlabel mep

mep_id config port
Ethernet OAM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
lagnumber
For example: lag18
pri
range.
Example
To be supplied.

delete
Description
This command deletes a MEP

The successful completion of this command also updates the MEP List Table by
removing the newly deleted MEP.
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
md_userlabel

ma_userlabel

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
13-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mep_id
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY

delete
Ethernet OAM

show
Description
This command displays a MEP.

Syntax definitions
md_userlabel

ma_userlabel

mep_id
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
13-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

loopback remote {macAddr | mep_id} [pri pri]
Ethernet OAM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

loopback remote {macAddr | mep_id} [pri pri]
Description
This command performs a Loopback operation with a remote MAC destination address or
MEP ID by configuring the optional priority value.
Syntax definitions
md_userlabel

ma_userlabel

mep_id
macAddr

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
pri
range.
Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
13-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

loopback show
Description
This command displays a Loopback operation.
PRELIMINARY

loopback show
Ethernet OAM
Syntax definitions
md_userlabel

ma_userlabel

mep_id
Example
To be supplied.

linktrace remote {macAddr | mep_id} [ttl ttl_value]
Description
This command performs a LinkTrace operation with a remote MAC destination address
or MEP ID and sets the optional TTL value.
Syntax definitions
md_userlabel


macAddr
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
13-13
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
ma_userlabel
PRELIMINARY

linktrace remote {macAddr | mep_id} [ttl ttl_value]
Ethernet OAM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
mep_id
ttl_value
An integer value in the range 0-255, indicating the LTM TTL field for Link Trace
Manager. The default value is 64.
Example
To be supplied.

linktrace show
Description
This command displays a LinkTrace operation. Results are returned as a list of entries.
Each entry displays the following information about received LTR:
replyTtl : value 0-255

ltmForwarded : bool
terminalMEP : bool
lastEgressIdentifier : MACaddress
nextEgressIdentifier : MACaddress
relayAction : {Hit | Fdb | Mpdb}
replyIngress : action + MACaddress + PortID

replyEgress : action + MACaddress + PortID
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
md_userlabel

ma_userlabel

mep_id
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
13-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY

linktrace show
Ethernet OAM

Description
This command configures a non-standard Ethernet OAM EtherType value. If EtherType

is not specified, it is initiated with default EtherType=0x8902.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
To be supplied.
ethoam etype show

Description
This command displays the Ethernet OAM Ethertype.

Syntax definitions
/A
Example
Cli:ADMIN > ethoam etype show
Eth OAM Ether Type: 0x8902
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
13-15
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
14
VPLS management
14
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to VPLS management.

Contents
vpls activate vpls_userlabel [portset naming_set_list_lagnumber_
set ] [pwset pw_set]
14-2
14-3
vpls config vpls_userlabel [learning {enable | disable}] [unkdiscarding

{enable | disable}]
14-3
14-4
vpls add vpls_userlabel [portset naming_set_list_lagnumber_set]

[pwset pw_set]
14-4
vpls remove vpls_userlabel [portset naming_set_list_lagnumber_

set] [pwset pw_set]
14-5
vpls static vpls_userlabel add mac macAddr port {naming | lagnumber}
14-6
vpls static vpls_userlabel remove mac macAddr port {naming |

lagnumber}
14-7
vpls static vpls_userlabel show mac macAddr port {naming | lagnumber}
14-8
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
14-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
VPLS management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command creates a VPLS Instance. It specifies the VP ID, and VPLS Egress Ports
(Individual, Aggregated, or PW). When the portset optional parameter is absent, the
VPLS Egress Port result is empty.
Syntax definitions
vpls_userlabel


,naming_set#n] is an expression using integer values in the range 1 - 4094,
example:
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
lag4-7&18
The following is an example of anaming_set_list_lagnumber_set
pw_set
An expression using PW Set. For example:
PRELIMINARY
pwr1sr1sl3-6&18p1-3.
Example
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
14-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command deletes a VPLS Instance

Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
VPLS management
vpls_userlabel

Example
To be supplied.
vpls config vpls_userlabel [learning {enable | disable}]

[unkdiscarding {enable | disable}]
Description
This command either enables or disables MAC learning, and configurse the behavior for
discarding unknown frames for a VPLS Instance.
Syntax definitions
vpls_userlabel

Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
14-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
VPLS management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command displays information for a VPLS Instance, including the port role for each
port in the VPLS.
Syntax definitions
vpls_userlabel

Example
To be supplied.
vpls add vpls_userlabel [portset naming_set_list_lagnumber_set] [pwset pw_set]

Description
This command adds UI and/or MPLS pseudowires to an existing VPLS Instance.
Syntax definitions
vpls_userlabel


r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
PRELIMINARY
5 are specified.
pw_set
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
14-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
vpls add vpls_userlabel [portset naming_set_list_lagnumber_set] [pwset pw_set]
VPLS management
vpls remove vpls_userlabel [portset naming_set_list_lagnumber_set] [pwset pw_set]

Description
This command removes a UI and/or MPLS pseudowire from an existing VPLS
Instance.
Syntax definitions
vpls_userlabel


r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
5 are specified.
pw_set

To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
14-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Example
PRELIMINARY
vpls static vpls_userlabel add mac macAddr port

{naming | lagnumber}
VPLS management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vpls static vpls_userlabel add mac macAddr port {naming

| lagnumber}
Description
This command adds a static unicast/multicast entry for a VPLS Instance with the
indication of an output port.
Syntax definitions
vpls_userlabel

macAddr

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
lagnumber
An expression lagN, where N is an integer value in the range [1 - 124], indicating the
For example: lag18
PRELIMINARY
Example
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
14-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vpls static vpls_userlabel remove mac macAddr port

Description
This command removes a static unicast/multicast entry for a VPLS Instance.
PRELIMINARY
vpls static vpls_userlabel remove mac macAddr port

VPLS management
Syntax definitions
vpls_userlabel

macAddr

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
lagnumber
For example: lag18
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
14-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
vpls static vpls_userlabel show mac macAddr port

VPLS management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vpls static vpls_userlabel show mac macAddr port {naming

| lagnumber}
Description
This command removes a static unicast/multicast entry for a VPLS Instance.

Syntax definitions
vpls_userlabel

macAddr

xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
lagnumber
For example: lag18
Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
14-8
PRELIMINARY
15
15
Virtual
output port
management
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to virtual output port management.
Contents
15-3
qos position naming_set_list portshaping { disable | port_shaping_

rate} [offset offset_size]
15-3
15-4
15-5
15-5
15-6
15-7
15-9
15-10
15-11
15-13
15-15
15-15
15-17
15-18
qos wred activate
15-18
qos wred config
15-19
15-21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
15-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
15-21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
15-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
Overview
This section contains various commands related to interface management.

Contents
qos position naming_set_list portshaping { disable | port_shaping_
rate} [offset offset_size]
15-3
15-4
qos position naming_set_list portshaping { disable |

port_shaping_rate} [offset offset_size]
Description
This command configures the egress port shaping rate.

Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

expression using integer values in the range 1 - 4094, ampersand (&) and hyphen (-)
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
port_shaping_rate
An integer value in the range [0 65535].

Example
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
15-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
offset_size
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves the egress port shaping rate.

Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

expression using integer values in the range 1 - 4094, ampersand (&) and hyphen (-)
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
port_shaping_rate
Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
15-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

Overview
This section contains various commands related to virtual transport management.

Contents
15-5
15-6
15-7
15-9
15-10
15-11
15-13

Description
This command configures a previously created Service-aware VT by setting the

Shaping Rate, Committed Rate, and User Label.
Full command

qos port {naming | lagnumber} enable vt_set [newvtlabel new_vt_userlabel]
[shaping {enable | disable}] [vtshaping vt_shaping_rate] [vtcir vt_cir_rate]
Syntax definitions
naming
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
15-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drawer
Port
0 or 17
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
lagnumber
For example: lag18
vt_set
An expression using integer values, in the range 1-40956, and specific symbols for
representing a set of Service-aware VT identifier value ranges. For instance, 1-3&21
means that the values 1,2,3,21 are specified.
new_vt_userlabel

vt_shaping_rate
An integer value that indicates the shaping rate for a Virtual Transport in Kbps.
vt_cir_rate
The committed rate, in Kbps, associated with a specific VT.

Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command disables a set of Service-aware VTs.

Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
naming
R
Rack
Subrack
17
0 or 17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
15-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
PRELIMINARY

lagnumber
For example: lag18
vt_set
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command configures the following:
A Default VT setting the User Label, Shaping (Enable/Disable), and Shaping Rate
A set of Service-aware VTs setting the Shaping Rate, Committed Rate, and User
Label.
Full command

qos port {naming|lagnumber} config {0 | vt_set} [newvtlabel new_vt_userlabel]
[shaping {enable | disable}] [vtshaping vt_shaping_rate] [vtcir vt_cir_rate]
Syntax definitions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
15-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
naming
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
lagnumber
For example: lag18
vt_set
new_vt_userlabel

vt_shaping_rate
An integer value that indicates the shaping rate for a Virtual Transport in Kbps.
vt_cir_rate
The committed rate, in Kbps, associated with a specific VT.

Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
15-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves a single (default or Service-aware) VT, or a list including

BOTH Default VT and active created Service-aware VTs.
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY

naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
lagnumber
For example: lag18
vt_set
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
15-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command binds an egress port (Service-aware VT) with either a Service
(S-VLA, MPLS Tunnel, PW, or VPLS Instance), or a range of Services (S-VLAs,
PWs, VPLS Instance identifiers, or ETS Flows).
Full command

qos port {naming | lagnumber} vt vtid bind service {svlan vlan_set | mpls
tunnel_id instance tunnel_instance ingress tunnel_ingress_ler egress
tunnel_egress_ler | pw pw_set| vpls vpls_userlabel1[,vpls_userlabel2,
vpls_userlabelN] | flow flow_userlabel1[,flow_userlabel2,
flow_userlabelN]}
Syntax definitions
naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
lagnumber
PRELIMINARY
For example: lag18

vtid
An integer value in the range 1-40956, indicating theService-aware VT identifier

vlan_set
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
15-10

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An expression using integer values in the range 1 - 4094 and specific symbols for
For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLA values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are
specified.
tunnel_id
PRELIMINARY
tunnel_instance
An integer value identifying a particular instance of a tunnel between a pair of ingress and
egress LSRs.
tunnel_ingress_ler
tunnel_egress_ler
pw_set

vpls_userlabel

flow_userlabel
Octet string representing name of ETS Flow label.

Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command unbinds an egress port, Service-aware VT from:

A Service (S-VLA, MPLS Tunnel, PW, or VPLS Instance)
A range of Services (S-VLAs, PWs, or VPLS Instance identifiers)

All Services previously associated with the egress port, Service-aware VT (the
default)
Full command

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
15-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
qos port {naming | lagnumber} vt vtid unbind service {svlan {all | vlan_set} |
mpls tunnel_id instance tunnel_instance ingress tunnel_ingress_ler egress
tunnel_egress_ler | pw {all | pw_set} | vpls {all | vpls_userlabel1[,
vpls_userlabel2,vpls_userlabelN]} | flow flow_userlabel1[,
flow_userlabel2,flow_userlabelN]}
Syntax definitions
naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
lagnumber
For example: lag18
vtid
An integer value in the range 1-40956, indicating the Service-aware VT identifier

vlan_set
An expression using integer values in the range 1 - 4094 and specific symbols for
For instance 100-103&2555 means that the VLA values 100, 101, 102, 103 and 2555 are
specified.
tunnel_id
PRELIMINARY

tunnel_instance
An integer value identifying a particular instance of a tunnel between a pair of ingress and
egress LSRs.
tunnel_ingress_ler
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
15-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
tunnel_egress_ler
pw_set
PRELIMINARY

vpls_userlabel

flow_userlabel

Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command retrieves information for a Service-aware VT associated with a Port and
Service (S-VLA, MPLS Tunnel, PW, VPLS Instance, or ETS Service)..
Syntax definitions
naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
lagnumber
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
15-13
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For example: lag18
vtid

Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
15-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

Overview
This section contains various commands related to virtual transport queue management.
Contents
15-15
15-17

Description
This command configures a VT queue and sets the Shaping Rate and Committed Rate.
Full command

qos port {naming | lagnumber} vt vtid config queue queuenumber
[vtqcir vtq_cir_rate]
[shaping {enable | disable}]
[vtqshaping vtq_shaping_rate]
[vtqcqs vtq_cqs]
[vtqeqs vtq_eqs]
[wredprofile wred_userlabel]
Syntax definitions
naming
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
15-15
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drawer
Port
0 or 17
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
lagnumber
For example: lag18
vtid
An integer value in the range 1-40956, indicating theService-aware VT identifier

queuenumber
An integer value in the range 0 to 7, specifying the queue identifier.

vtq_cir_rate
The committed rate of the egress Virtual Transport Queue in Kbps.

vtq_shaping_rate
The shaping rate of the egress Virtual Transport Queue in Kbps.

vtq_cqs
The size of the committed queue in bytes. The default value is 0.

vtq_eqs
The excessive queue size in bytes. The default value is 0.

wred_userlabel

Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
15-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
queuenumber
qos port {naming | lagnumber} vt vtid show queue

queuenumber
Description
This command retrieves information about a VT queue.
PRELIMINARY

qos port {naming | lagnumber} vt vtid show queue
Syntax definitions
naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
board, and port0.
lagnumber
For example: lag18
vtid

queuenumber
An integer value in the range 0 to 7, specifying the queue identifier.

Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
15-17
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to WRED profile management.

Contents
qos wred activate
15-18
qos wred config
15-19
15-21
15-21
qos wred activate

Description
This command creates and activates a WRED profile, and configures the WRED
parameters.
Full command

qos wred activate wred_userlabel
[GreenUpperThr green_upper_thr_value]
[GreenLowerThr green_lower_thr_value]
[GreenMaxProb green_max_prob_value]
[YellowUpperThr yellow_upper_thr_value]
[YellowLowerThr yellow_lower_thr_value]
PRELIMINARY
[YellowMaxProb yellow_max_prob_value]
Syntax definitions
wred_userlabel

green_upper_thr_value
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
15-18

qos wred activate
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The percentage of the buffer utilized (0-100), after which the drop probability of Green
packets is 100 percent. This means that all Green packets beyond this point will be
dropped. The default value is 90.
green_lower_thr_value
packets rises above 0. The default value is 70.
PRELIMINARY
The drop probability (0-100) of Green packets.

yellow_upper_thr_value
packets is 100 percent. This means that all Yellow packets beyond this point will be
yellow_lower_thr_value
The percentage of the buffer utilized (0-100), after which the drop probability of Yellow
yellow_max_prob_value
The drop probability (0-100) of Yellow packets . The default value is 80.
Example
To be supplied.
qos wred config

Description
This command configures the WRED parameters of an existing WRED profile.

Full command

qos wred config wred_userlabel
[GreenUpperThr green_upper_thr_value]
[GreenLowerThr green_lower_thr_value]
[YellowUpperThr yellow_upper_thr_value]
[YellowLowerThr yellow_lower_thr_value]
[YellowMaxProb yellow_max_prob_value]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
15-19
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
[GreenMaxProb green_max_prob_value]
PRELIMINARY

qos wred config
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Syntax definitions
wred_userlabel

green_upper_thr_value
packets is 100 percent. This means that all Green packets beyond this point will be
green_lower_thr_value
The drop probability (0-100) of Green packets.

yellow_upper_thr_value
packets is 100 percent. This means that all Yellow packets beyond this point will be
yellow_lower_thr_value
The percentage of the buffer utilized (0-100), after which the drop probability of Yellow
yellow_max_prob_value
The drop probability (0-100) of Yellow packets . The default value is 80.
Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
15-20

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command deletes a WRED profile.

Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
wred_userlabel

Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command retrieves information for a WRED profile.

Syntax definitions
wred_userlabel

Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
15-21
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
16
16
Performance
monitoring
management commands
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to performance monitoring management.

Contents
16-2
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-5
16-5
16-6
16-7
pmqos port naming_set_list config period {15min | 1h | 24h} reset {enable |

disable}
16-8
pmqos port naming_set_list show historydata period {15min | 1h | 24h}
16-9
16-10
pmqos service flow_userlabel config period {15min | 1h | 24h} reset

{enable | disable}
16-10
16-11
16-11
pmqos service flow_userlabel show historydata period {15min | 1h | 24h}
16-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
16-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to maintenance measurement collection.

Contents
16-2
16-3
16-4

Description
This command requesst the incoming and outgoing aggregate maintenance counters
(type1) including the retrieving time.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
PRELIMINARY
Example
The following example shows information about the incoming and outgoing counters for
the specified port (interface 1 of drawer 1 of the board in slot 6):
Cli:ADMIN > pmmaint
Cli:ADMIN (pmaint) > show port r1sr1sl6d1p1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
16-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Show Aggregate maintenance counters r1sr1sl6d1p1

--------------------------------------------------Aggr Maint Rx Retrieving Time: -----Aggr Maint Rx TRCO: -----Aggr Maint Rx TRCF: -----Aggr Maint Rx TRSEF: -----Aggr Maint Rx TDF: -----Aggr Maint Rx Last Disc. Time: ------
PRELIMINARY
Show Aggregate maintenance counters r1sr1sl6d1p1

--------------------------------------------------Aggr Maint Tx Retrieving Time: -----Aggr Maint Tx TTO: -----Aggr Maint Tx TTF: -----Aggr Maint Tx TDF: -----Aggr Maint Tx Last Disc. Time: ------

Description
This command permits requests based on:
pbflowbid Incoming and Outgoing Flow maintenance counters, associated to the

present ETS Inflow/OutFlow, and the retrieving time
portportbid Incoming and Outgoing Flow maintenance counters, associated to the

ETS Inflow/Outflow of both the involved ETS ports, and the retrieving time
pbflowinunidir Incoming Flow maintenance counters, associated to the present
ETS Inflow, and the retrieving time
pbflowoutunidir Outgoing Flow maintenance counters, associated to the present

ETS Outflow, and retrieving time
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and TSS-160),
Release 3.1 User Provisioning Guide for details about flows.
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
16-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Example
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command requests the following PM counters on an Ethernet physical interface

including the retrieving time:
SymbolError
MediaAvailableExits
JabberState
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example displays information about all PM counters for a specific Ethernet
Cli:ADMIN > pmmaint show ethphy r1sr1sl6d1p1
Show Ethernet physical interface counters r1sr1sl6d1p1
-------------------------------------------------------IfMau HC False Carries:
IfMau HC Jabbering State Enters:
IfMau HC Media Available State Exits:
Retrieving Time:
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN >
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
16-4

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
This section contains various commands related to QOS measurement collection.

Contents
16-5
16-6
16-7
pmqos port naming_set_list config period {15min | 1h | 24h} reset {enable |

disable}
16-8
pmqos port naming_set_list show historydata period {15min | 1h | 24h}
16-9
16-10
pmqos service flow_userlabel config period {15min | 1h | 24h} reset

{enable | disable}
16-10
16-11
16-11
pmqos service flow_userlabel show historydata period {15min | 1h | 24h}
16-12
pmqos port naming_set_list activate period {15min | 1h |

24h}
Description
This command allocates Aggregate Current Data (CD) counters (for both the incoming
and outgoing direction) on a local Ethernet port.
Syntax definitions

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
16-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
naming_set_list
PRELIMINARY

pmqos port naming_set_list activate period {15min | 1h
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
| 24h}
r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
To be supplied.
pmqos port naming_set_list delete period {15min | 1h |

24h}
Description
This command deletes the Aggregate CD counters with a provisioned granularity period
(in both the incoming and outgoing direction) on a local Ethernet port.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
16-6
pmqos port naming_set_list show currentdata period

{15min | 1h | 24h}
Description
This command displays the Incoming and Outgoing Aggregate CD counters on a local
Ethernet port.
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
{15min | 1h | 24h}
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example displays information about all Current Data counters for a specific
Cli:ADMIN > pmqos show port r1sr1sl6d1p1 currentdata
Show Aggregate Current Data counters r1sr1sl6d1p1
--------------------------------------------------Aggr CD Rx TRCF: -----Aggr CD Rx TRCFUnicast: -----Aggr CD Rx TRCFMulticast: -----Aggr CD Rx TRCFBroadcast: -----Aggr CD Rx TRCO: -----Aggr CD Rx Start Time: -----Aggr CD Rx Last Disc. Time: -----Aggr CD Rx Start by: ------
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
16-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

--------------------------------------------------Aggr CD Tx TTF: -----Aggr CD Tx TTFUnicast: -----Aggr CD Tx TTFMulticast: -----Aggr CD Tx TTFBroadcast: -----Aggr CD Tx TTO: -----Aggr CD Tx Start Time: ------
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
{15min | 1h | 24h}
Aggr CD Tx Last Disc. Time: -----Aggr CD Tx Start by: -----Cli:ADMIN >
pmqos port naming_set_list config period {15min | 1h |

24h} reset {enable | disable}
Description
This command configures a reset operation over Aggregate CD counters (in both
incoming and outgoing direction) on a local Ethernet port.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
The following example displays information about all Current Data counters for a specific
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > pmqos show port r1sr1sl6d1p1 currentdata

--------------------------------------------------Aggr CD Rx TRCF: -----Aggr CD Rx TRCFUnicast: -----Aggr CD Rx TRCFMulticast: -----Aggr CD Rx TRCFBroadcast: -----Aggr CD Rx TRCO: -----Aggr CD Rx Start Time: -----Aggr CD Rx Last Disc. Time: -----Aggr CD Rx Start by: -----Show Aggregate Current Data counters r1sr1sl6d1p1
--------------------------------------------------...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
16-8
Aggr CD Tx TTF: -----Aggr CD Tx TTFUnicast: -----Aggr CD Tx TTFMulticast: -----Aggr CD Tx TTFBroadcast: -----Aggr CD Tx TTO: -----Aggr CD Tx Start Time: -----Aggr CD Tx Last Disc. Time: -----Aggr CD Tx Start by: -----Cli:ADMIN >
PRELIMINARY

pmqos port naming_set_list config period {15min | 1h |
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
pmqos port naming_set_list show historydata period

{15min | 1h | 24h}
Description
This command retrieves both incoming and outgoing aggregate history data counters with
a configured granularity period on a local Ethernet port.
Syntax definitions
naming_set_list

r1sr1sl3-6&18d0p1-3
r1sr1sl7-9&19d0p4-6
Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
16-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

pmqos service flow_userlabel activate period {15min |
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1h | 24h}
pmqos service flow_userlabel activate period {15min | 1h

| 24h}
Description
This command allocates CD counters for a granularity period on an ETS flow basis, and
to enable or disabled reset operation for the PM Counter.
This command activates:
pbflowbid Incoming and Outgoing Flow CD counters, associated only to the

present ETS Inflow/OutFlow
portportbid Incoming and Outgoing Flow CD counters, associated to the ETS

Inflow/Outflow of both the involved ETS ports
pbflowinunidir Incoming Flow CD counters, associated only to the present ETS
Inflow
pbflowoutunidir Outgoing Flow CD counters, associated only to the present ETS

Outflow
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 Transport Service Switch (TSS-320 and TSS-160),
Release 3.1 User Provisioning Guide for details about flows.
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

Example
To be supplied.
pmqos service flow_userlabel config period {15min | 1h |

Description
This command enables or disables the reset operation for a PM Counter.
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
16-10
Example
To be supplied.
pmqos service flow_userlabel delete period {15min | 1h |

24h}
PRELIMINARY

pmqos service flow_userlabel config period {15min | 1h
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
| 24h} reset {enable | disable}
Description
This command deletes CD counters (for a specified granularity period) on an ETS flow
basis. See the pmqos service flow_userlabel activate period {15min | 1h | 24h}
(p. 16-10) command for a description of each service type.
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

Example
To be supplied.
pmqos service flow_userlabel show currentdata period

{15min | 1h | 24h }
Description
This command retrieves the Incoming and current Outgoing Flow information for a
service over the specified period. See the pmqos service flow_userlabel activate
period {15min | 1h | 24h} (p. 16-10) command for a description of each service type.
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

Example
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
16-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY

pmqos service flow_userlabel show historydata period
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
{15min | 1h | 24h}
pmqos service flow_userlabel show historydata period

{15min | 1h | 24h}
Description
This command retrieves the Incoming and Outgoing Flow history over the specified
period for a service. See the pmqos service flow_userlabel activate period {15min |
1h | 24h} (p. 16-10) command for a description of each service type.
Syntax definitions
flow_userlabel

Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
16-12
PRELIMINARY
17
17
Support
management
commands
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to support management.

Contents
17-3
alarmlist
17-3
17-5
log info
17-6
log alarm
17-6
log event
17-8
17-11
severitydef config severity
17-11
severitydef show
17-12
17-12
17-13
17-14
alarmprofile rename alarmprofile_userlabel into alarmprofile_
17-14
userlabel
17-15
Agent management
17-16
17-16
17-17
ne mgr {B$ | E$}
17-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
17-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ne show info
17-18
17-19
Auto provisioning
17-20
plugandplay {confirmed | full | no}
17-20
plugandplay show
17-21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
17-2

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
This section contains various commands related to alarm list and log management.
Contents
alarmlist
17-3
17-5
log info
17-6
log alarm
17-6
log event
17-8
alarmlist
Description
This command retrieves the current active Alarm List.

You can configure the output by means of one or more combined optional parameters to
select all alarms for:
A specific domain
A specific severity value
A specific instant or within a specific time interval
A specific resource
Full command

alarmlist [domain domain_name] [severity severity] [time
[yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[- [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
17-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

alarmlist
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Syntax definitions
drawer0, and drawer=port=0. For commands that apply to a port, the naming must
have rack, subrack, board, and port0.
domain_name
The domain name in the set {eqpt | ts | pm}.

severity
The associated severity in the set {critical | major | minor | warning | indeterminate}.
yy:mm:dd

hh:mm:ss
Hour (hh), an integer value in the range 023.

Minute (mm), an integer value in the range 059.
Second (ss), an integer value in the range 059.
naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
Example
The following example shows the information about the active Alarm List:
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > alarmlist

Time
Resource Alarm
Status Severity
==========================================================
06-07-12 12:55:03 r1sr1sl2d1p1 URU
on
major
06-07-12 12:55:32 r1sr1sl2d1p2 URU
on
major
06-07-12 17:28:42 r1sr1sl2d1p6 URU
on
major
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
17-4
alarmsynth [domain domain_name] | [severity

severity_name]
Description
This command retrieves a synthesis of the currently active alarms (for example, the
number of alarms grouped for different severity or different relevant domain, according to
the entered optional parameters).
PRELIMINARY

alarmsynth [domain domain_name] | [severity
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
severity_name]
If no optional parameter is specified, severity is applied.

Syntax definitions
domain_name

severity_name
Example
The following example shows the information about the synthesis of the currently active
alarms:
Cli:ADMIN > alarmsynth
EQUIPMENT
TRANSMISSION
PERF. MONIT.
=========================================================
critical
major
3
minor
warning
indeterminate
cleared
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
17-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

log info
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
log info
Description
This command retrieves basic configuration information about the log.

Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows the information about the log:

Cli:ADMIN > log info
Show log Info .1
-----------------Log Type: AlarmLog (1.3.6.1.4.1.637.54.1.1.3.1.5)
Log Admin Status: unlocked (1)
Log Oper Status: enabled (1)
Log Max Size: 1000
Max Notification Id: 2147483674
Show log Info .2
-----------------Log Type: Eventlog (1.3.6.1.4.1.637.54.1.1.3.1.4)
Log Admin Status: unlocked (1)
Log Oper Status: enabled (1)
Log Max Size: 1000
Max Notification Id: 2147483674
log alarm
Description
This command allows you to get the alarm log records.
PRELIMINARY
You can target the output by means of one or more combined optional parameters, which
allow selection of all alarm log records for:
A specific domain
A specific severity value
A specific resource
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
17-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Full command

log alarm [domain domain_name] [severity severity] [time
[yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[- [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position naming]
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY

log alarm
domain_name

severity
yy:mm:dd

hh:mm:ss

naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
17-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

log alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
The following example shows the information about the alarm log records:
Cli:ADMIN > log alarm
Time
Resource
Alarm
Status
Severity
==========================================================
1970-01-01 14:02:
1970-01-01 14:05:
1970-01-01 14:06:
1970-01-01 14:31:
1970-01-03 11:39:
06-07-12 11:31:31
06-07-12 11:31:31
06-07-12 11:31:31
06-07-12 12:55:03
06-07-12 12:55:32
06-07-12 12:55:56
06-07-12 12:57:33
06-07-12 17:28:42
r1sr1sl2d1p1
r1sr1sl2d1p2
r1sr1sl2d1p6
r1sr1sl2d1p6
r1sr1sl2d1p6
r1sr1sl2d1p1
r1sr1sl2d1p2
r1sr1sl2d1p6
r1sr1sl2d1p1
r1sr1sl2d1p2
r1sr1sl2d1p6
r1sr1sl2d1p6
r1sr1sl2d1p6
URU
URU
URU
URU
URU
URU
URU
URU
URU
URU
URU
URU
URU
off
off
off
off
off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
cleared
cleared
cleared
cleared
cleared
major
major
major
major
major
major
major
major
log event
Description
This command retrieves the event log records.

The user can target the output by means of one or more combined optional parameters,
which allow selection of all event log records for:

A specific resource
Full command

log event [time [yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss[-[yy:mm:dd:]hh:mm:ss]] [position
naming]
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
17-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
yy:mm:dd

hh:mm:ss
PRELIMINARY

log event

naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
Example
The following example shows the information about the log events:
Cli:opticsIMCtUsrId > log event
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
17-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Time
EventType
Resource
===========================================================
1970-01-03 02:51: attributeValueChange ( r1sr1sl2d1
PRELIMINARY

log event
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
1970-01-03
03:01:
03:02:
03:02:
03:03:
03:03:
03:04:
03:04:
03:05:
03:05:
03:06:
03:06:
03:07:
03:08:
03:09:
03:09:
03:10:
03:10:
03:11:
03:11:
03:12:
03:12:
03:13:
03:13:
attributeValueChange
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
r1sr1sl2d1
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
17-10

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY
This section contains various commands related to alarm profile management.

Contents
17-11
severitydef show
17-12
17-12
17-13
17-14
alarmprofile rename alarmprofile_userlabel into alarmprofile_
17-14
userlabel
17-15

Description
This command sets the default severity.

Syntax definitions
severity
Example
Cli:ADMIN (severitydef) > config major

Cli:ADMIN (severitydef) > show
Alarm Severity Default: major (2)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
17-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
The first command sets the severity

The second command reports the updated severity definition information.
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cli:ADMIN (severitydef) >
severitydef show
Description
This command retrieves the default severity.

Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows the severity definition information.

Cli:ADMIN > severitydef show
Alarm Severity Default: minor (3)
Cli:ADMIN >

Description
This command creates a new alarm profile. It is possible to create a clone of an existing
alarm profile by specifying its user label.
If a clone is not provided, an alarm profile is created in which the default severity is
assigned to all probable causes. It is also possible to modify the severity, and the severity
non-traffic-affecting causes when the profile is created.
Full command

alarmprofile create alarmprofile_userlabel [cloneof alarmprofile_userlabel] [pcauselist pcause:confseverity:confseveritynsa [pcause:confseverity:confseveritynsa]...]
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions

pcause
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
17-12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A string representing a probable cause.

For more information, refer to Table 1-4, Alarm and cause relationship (p. 1-24).
confseverity, confseveritynsa
The configured severity or severity non-service affecting causes in the set {critical |
major | minor | warning | indeterminate | cleared}.
PRELIMINARY
Example
In the following examples display two commands:
The first command example creates an Alarm Severity Profile;

The command in the second example displays all the updated Alarm Severity Profile
information.
Cli:ADMIN > alarmprofile create alprof1
Cli:ADMIN > alarmprofile show
Index Alarm Severity Profile User Label
Status
------ -------------------------------------------------- --------1
no alarm
active (1)
2
primary alarms
active (1)
3
path alarms
active (1)
4
all alarms
active (1)
20001 alprof1
active (1)

Description
This command deletes an alarm profile.

Syntax definitions

Example
Cli:ADMIN > alarmprofile delete alprof1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
17-13
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
In the following example is shown the deletion of a specific Alarm Severity Profile:
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command modifies the severity and the severity of non-service affecting causes
associated with an Alarm Profile.
Full command

alarmprofile config alarmprofile_userlabel pcauselist pcause:confseverity:confseveritynsa [pcause:confseverity:confseveritynsa]...
Syntax definitions

pcause
A string representing a probable cause.

For more information, refer to Table 1-4, Alarm and cause relationship (p. 1-24).
confseverity, confseveritynsa
The configured severity or severity non-service affecting causes in the set {critical |
major | minor | warning | indeterminate | cleared}.
Example
To be supplied.
alarmprofile rename alarmprofile_userlabel into

Description
This command changes the label of an alarm profile that was created by a user.
PRELIMINARY
Syntax definitions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
17-14

alarmprofile rename alarmprofile_userlabel into
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Example
The following example displays two commands.
The first command renames a specific Alarm Severity Profile
The second command displays the updated Alarm Severity Profile information
Cli:ADMIN > alarmprofile rename alprof1 into alarprofile1
Index Alarm Severity Profile User Label
Status
------ -------------------------------------------------- --------1
no alarm
active (1)
2
primary alarms
active (1)
3
path alarms
active (1)
4
all alarms
active (1)
20001 alarprofile1
active (1)
PRELIMINARY

Description
If no alarm profile user label is specified, this command retrieves a list of the user labels
for all alarm profiles.
If an user label is specified, this command retrieves the details of that alarm profile.
Syntax definitions

Example
The following example shows all the relevant Alarm Severity Profile information:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
17-15
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
LabelKey Alarm Severity Profile User Label Status

----------- --------------------------------- ----@1
'no alarm'
active (1)
@2
'primary alarms'
active (1)
@3
'path alarms'
active (1)
@4
'all alarms'
active (1)
PRELIMINARY
Agent management
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Agent management
Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to agent management.

Contents
17-16
17-17
ne mgr {B$ | E$}
17-17
ne show info
17-18
17-19
Description
This command configures information to identify the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and
TSS-160 location.
Syntax definitions
nelocation
A string indicating the location of the node.

Example
The following example shows the command to set the etwork Element location:
Cli:ADMIN (ne) > location pluto
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
17-16
Agent management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
This command configures the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160 label.
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
ne_userlabel

Example
The following example shows the command to set a etwork Element label:
Cli:ADMIN (ne) > label pippero
ne mgr {B$ | E$}

Description
This command uses the B$ flag to select the Bandwidth Manager or the E$ flag to select
the Element Manager to manage Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows the command output:

Cli:ADMIN (ne) > mgr E$
>> error: denied command for login profile
Cli:ADMIN (ne) > mgr B$
>> error: denied command for login profile
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
17-17
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Agent management
ne show info
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ne show info
Description
This command retrieves the following Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160
information:
E installation type
IM version
E location
E label
Label of the OS managing the E
E SW release
Configuration of management interface.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows the etwork Element information:

Cli:ADMIN > ne show info
PRELIMINARY
Show Ne Info
--------------Ne Installation Type: ne1850tss-320
Info Model Version Major: 3
Info Model Version Minor: 0
Info Model Version Maintenance:
sys Location: c4
Sdh Ne Label: 1850TSS320 Documentazione
Ne Owns By Mgr: $
sysDescr: V010400
Mng Interface Type: snmp (1)
Mng Interface Characterization: secondary (1)
Mng Interface Address Type: ipAddress (0)
Mng Interface Address: 10.10.10.10:161
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
17-18
Agent management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This command retrieves the Local Access Control (LAC) information.

Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
/A
Example
The following example shows the information about Local Access Control (LAC).
Cli:ADMIN (accessctrl) > show info
Show Access Ctrl Info .1
-------------------------Lac State: accessGranted (2)
Lac NoResponse TimeOutPeriod: 60
database Modify: 0
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
17-19
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Auto provisioning
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Auto provisioning
Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to auto provisioning.

Contents
17-20
plugandplay show
17-21

Description
This command allows you to set the auto-provisioning mode on Alcatel-Lucent 1850
TSS-320 and TSS-160.
ote: The CLI can perform only full and no auto-provisioning behavior. When
confirmed option is configured, the CLI behaves as in case of no auto-provisioning.
This means that no confirmation is provided about new plugged item. As result, no
automatic configuration is performed.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows the command to set auto-provisioning to confirmed.
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > plugandplay confirmed

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
17-20
Auto provisioning
plugandplay show
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
plugandplay show
Description
This command allows you to get the auto-provisioning configuration on Alcatel-Lucent

1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160.
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
/A
Example
The following example shows the command to display the auto-provisioning

configuration.
Cli:ADMIN > plugandplay show
NE Auto Provisioning:
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
17-21
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
18
18
Communication
and
routing management
commands
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various commands related to communication and routing

management.
Contents
18-2
ne show addr
18-2
18-3
18-3
infiberinband delete port {naming | lagnumber}
18-4
infiberinband show [port {naming | lagnumber}]
18-5
18-6
routingstatic activate ip ipAddr [ipmask ipAddrBitMask] port {naming |

lagnumber}
18-6
18-7
18-8
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
18-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to agent address management.

Contents
ne show addr
18-2
ne show addr
Description
This command displays the Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160 etwork Element
agent IP address, netmask, and UDP port.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows information about agent addresses:
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > ne show addr

Snmp Agt Ip Address: 10.10.10.10
Snmp Agt Ip Mask: 255.255.255.255
Snmp Agt Udp Port: 161
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
18-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
PRELIMINARY

Overview
Contents
18-3
18-4
18-5

Description
This command creates and activates an In-Fiber In-Band management interface and
specifies an optional rate for data management traffic.
Full command

infiberinband activate port {naming | lagnumber} [vlan vlan_id | mnglabel
mgmt_label] [ppp {enable | disable}] [routingprot {static | isis}] [ratelimited
dcn_ratelimited_value]
Syntax definitions
naming
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
18-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lagnumber
For example: lag18
vlan_id
An integer value in the range 14094, indicating the VID or the lower boundary of a
VLA ID range.
mgmt_label
A value in the range 0-4294967295, identifying an MPLS Label for the Management
Plane.
dcn_ratelimited_value
The maximum allowed rate, measured in Kbps, for management traffic over an interface.
The default Value is IfSpeed no rate limited traffic on this interface.
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command deletes an In-Fiber In-Band management interface.

Syntax definitions
naming
PRELIMINARY
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
18-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lagnumber
PRELIMINARY

For example: lag18

Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command retrieves detailed information about all configured DC management
interfaces. With the optional parameter, the user can retrieve detailed information of a
specific DC management interface by providing its naming specification.
Syntax definitions
naming
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
Port
0 or 11023
Example
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
18-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY

Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Purpose
This section contains various commands related to the IP management plane and IP
routing management.
Contents
routingstatic activate ip ipAddr [ipmask ipAddrBitMask] port {naming |
lagnumber}
18-6
18-7
18-8
routingstatic activate ip ipAddr [ipmask ipAddrBitMask]

port {naming | lagnumber}
Description
This command creates and activates a static IP routing path by providing the destination
IP address, netmask, and the outgoing E interface.
Syntax definitions
ipAddr

ipAddrBitMask
An IP address netmask in decimal dot-separated format: n.n.n.n

naming
PRELIMINARY
R
Rack
17
Subrack
0 or 17
Board
0 or 143
Drawer
0 or 17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
18-6
Port
0 or 11023
lagnumber
PRELIMINARY

routingstatic activate ip ipAddr [ipmask ipAddrBitMask]
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
port {naming | lagnumber}
For example: lag18
Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command deletes a static IP routing path.

Syntax definitions
ipAddr

Example
To be supplied.
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
18-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
If no optional parameter is provided, this command retrieves information about all

configured IP static routing paths.
The user can provide the IP address to get information for a single destination.
Syntax definitions
ipAddr

Example
PRELIMINARY
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
18-8
PRELIMINARY
19
Utility commands
19
Overview
Purpose
This chapter contains various utility commands.

Contents
19-1
administrator show
19-2
19-3
view
19-3
administrator backup
19-5
19-5
Description
This is a global command. It can be executed in any domain.

This command configures the following utilities:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
19-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
traceused to enable or disable additional details in the error trace. The default value
is, disable.
confirmused to enable or disable output paging. The message, press any key to
continue (Q to quit) will be presented when this is enabled. The default value is,
enable.
checkuserlabelused to enable or disable the univocity check of the userlabel in
create commands. If it is enabled, and the userlabel already exists, a confirmation
message, Press Y key to confirm command will be presented. Default value is
enable.
PRELIMINARY
Utility commands
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
commandlogused to enable or disable the trace of all commands without output. It

is recorded in the file CliCommandLog.txt. When the configured size is reached, the
file is copied in CliCommandLog.txt.old and reset. The default size is 160,000 bytes.
This copy will also be done if the clear option is specified. The default value is
disable.
outputlogused to enable or disable the trace of the output of all commands when
commandlog is enabled. It is recorded in the file CliCommandLog.txt. When the
configured size is reached, the file is copied in CliCommandLog.txt.old and reset. The
default size is 160,000 bytes. Default value is, disable.
Full command

[ trace { enable | disable | errorEnable | readEnable | write Enable} ]
[ confirm { enable | disable } ]
[ checkuserlabel { enable | disable } ]
[ commandlog { enable | disable | clear | show } ]
[ outputlog { enable | disable } ]
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
To be supplied.
administrator show
Description
This is a global command. It can be executed in any domain. This command retrieves the
current configuration of the features set with administrator config (p. 19-1).
Syntax definitions
/A
PRELIMINARY
Example
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
19-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Description
This is a global command. It can be executed in any domain. At run time, this command
allows you to read the CliMibValuesMapping.cfg configuration file.
Syntax definitions
PRELIMINARY
Utility commands
/A
Example
To be supplied.
view
Description
This is a global command. It can be executed in any domain.

This command retrieves information that is defined in another domain but useful in the
current domain. It includes:
view asapto get a list of user labels for all alarm profiles (see, alarmprofile show
[alarmprofile_userlabel] (p. 17-15))
view interfaceto get a list of all configured interfaces with their interface type,
Ethernet port client layer, administrative status, and traffic port enabling status (see,
interface show [naming_set_list] (p. 3-3))
view trafficto get a list of all of all configured interfaces with related their
administrative status, traffic port enabling, operation status, speed, limited speed, and
floodingRate (see, interface trafficshow [naming_set_list] (p. 3-4))
view colorprofileto get a list of all color profiles with their related information (see,
colorprofile show [colorprof_userlabel] (p. 5-8))
view flowto get a list of all configured cross-connections (xcIndex.inflowIndex.outflowIndex)

view vlanto get a list of all static VLA or S-VLA registration entry information
(see, bridge vlan show [vlan_set] (p. 7-9))
view vlan [vlan_id]to get all information for a specific VLA
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
19-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
view trafficdescriptorto get a list of all ETS traffic descriptors with their related
traffic type, traffic parameters, and status (see, trafficdescriptor show
[trafficdescriptor_userlabel] (p. 5-12))
view inflowto get a list of all configured inflows
view outflowto get a list of all configured outflows
PRELIMINARY
view
Utility commands
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
view vlanprotprofileto get a list of all defined VLA protocol profiles in the E
(see, bridge vlanprotprofile show [vlanprotprof_userlabel] (p. 7-17))
view lagto get a list of all configured link aggregation groups with their related
information; lag number, user label, administrative key, and size (see, linkagg show
[lagnumber_set] (p. 10-6))
view vplsto get the list of all VPLS Instances

view mdto get the list of all Ethernet OAM Maintenance Domains
view {port naming | lagnumber}to get all information for a specific port
Full command

view { asap | interface [up | down] | traffic [up | down] | colorprofile | trafficdescriptor |
inflow | outflow | flow | vlan [vlan_id] | vlanprotprofile | lag | vpls | md | {port naming |
lagnumber} }
Syntax definitions
vlan_id
An integer value in the range 1-4094, indicating the VID or the lower boundary of a
VLA ID range.
naming
R
Rack
1-7
Subrack
0, 1-7
Board
0, 1-43
Drawer
0, 1-7
Port
0, 1-1023
lagnumber
For example: lag18
PRELIMINARY
Example
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
19-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Description
This command creates a file (filename) containing CLI commands to duplicate selected
domains. The all parameter indicates all domains. The target parameters specify the E
version for migration and have a default value of v1.
PRELIMINARY
Utility commands
Full command

administrator backup filename { all | default | [equipment] [transmission] [connection]
[pm] [support] } [target {v1 | v2 | v3}]
Syntax definitions
filename
A string indicating the valid name of file.

Example
To be supplied.

Description
This command executes CLI commands inside a file designated by the filename
parameter.
There are two options:
-noechowhen specified, does not display CLI commands as they are executed. The
default value is -echo.
-historywhen specified, displays the history of CLI commands
Syntax definitions
filename
A string indicating the valid name of file.
To be supplied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
19-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Example
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
PRELIMINARY
20
Debug commands
20
Overview
Purpose
Contents
debug ne show info
20-1
20-2
20-2
debug ne show info

Description
This command retrieves the following network element information for the
Alcatel-Lucent 1850 TSS-320 and TSS-160:
System name: indicates that the E software release is not backward compatible.
aming mask rule: the number of bits that are used for each field.
Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows debug information being retrieved.
Show NE info
-----------------------------------------------sys Name: sysadmin
MibConfigurationMode: online (1)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
20-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > debug ne show info
PRELIMINARY
debug ne show info
Debug commands
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MaskNamingRule: 4X3r3s6b3d0p3c

Description
This command displays CLI manager information in the opticsIMMgrPollingInfoTable.

Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows CLI manager information being retrieved.

Cli:ADMIN > debug mgrcli show info
Show CLI Info 9.9
-------------------MgrPollingIpAddress: 10.0.0.5
MgrPollingUdpPort: 4000
MgrPollingTimeOut: -----MgrPollingManagerType: ------

Description
This command displays info about traps to be sent to managers.

Syntax definitions
/A
Example
The following example shows the trap information being retrieved.
PRELIMINARY
Cli:ADMIN > debug trap show info

Show CLI Info 9.9
-------------------MgrPollingIpAddress: 10.0.0.5
MgrPollingUdpPort: 4000
MgrPollingTimeOut: -----MgrPollingManagerType: -----...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
20-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Symbols
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
Micrometer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Numerics
1:1
A 1:n system where n=1.

1:n
n main and one standby (or protection). The main channels provide service: If a main channel
fails, the standby channel switches to provide service in place of failed channel. Switching is
revertive, which permits extra traffic to be carried on the standby channel. (For example, when the
main channel is repaired, service will be switched back to it, thus making the standby channel
available to protect a subsequent failure.)
1+1, 1p1
on-expandable protection scheme. Two full-duplex channels: one active, one standby; either can
provide service. Protection switching behavior may be revertive or nonrevertive (normal case).
When active channel fails, traffic is switched to standby channel. In revertive, one channel is the
preferred active; when preferred channel is repaired, traffic switches back to it. In nonrevertive
neither channel is preferred, and switch-back does not occur.
2fblsr
Two-Fiber Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring. See Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring)

4fblsr
Four-Fiber Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring. See Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring).

802:1e
An IEEE protocol that allows the loading of a file on an E on a multicast or point-to-point basis.
ABN
Abnormal alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
abn confg
Abnormal Configuration
abt
Abort Output Function.

access identifier (aid)
Specifies the object entity (port or equipment) specified in a TL1 command; used to specify
"object entities" within an E to which user commands are to be applied. Facilities and signals
are examples of object entities. The term "object entity" is used by Telcordia; it does not mean the
E is implemented in an object-oriented manner.
ACD
Access Control Domain

ACL
Access Control List

ACM
Administrative Communications Module (module).

ACO
See Alarm Cutoff (ACO).

act
1. Active redundant.
2. Active unit.
3. Active secondary service state; indicates that the entity is capable of being protected and is
currently the active entity.
ACU
Alarm communications unit.

Add-Drop Multiplexer (ADM)
PRELIMINARY
etwork elements that provide access to all , or some subset M of Synchronous Transport
Signal (STS) line signals contained within an OC- optical channel. (M is a standard hierarchical
level v.) STSs are added to (inserted) and/or dropped from (extracted) the OC- signal as it
passes through the ADM. ADMs include linear applications between terminals (referred to as a
Linear ADM or LADM) and ring network applications (referred to as unidirectional ring
[uni-ring] and bidirectional ring [bi-ring] ADMs). See also Linear Add-Drop Multiplexer
(LADM).
addr
Address.
adm
See Add-Drop Multiplexer (ADM).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
admin
Administrative domain server.

administrator
A user who has access to all security, system, and database maintenance functions in addition to
standard user capabilities.
ADR
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
Add-Drop Ring.
AGC
Automatic Gain Control.

AIC
Application Identification Channel. Identifies DS3 frame application (C-bit=1, W23=alternate 0s

and 1s).
AID
See Access Identifier (AID).

AINS
Automatic In-Service.
AINSTH
Automatic In-Service Threshold

AIS
See Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).

AISL
Alarm Indication Signal, Line. See Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).

AISS
AIS Second.
Alarm (ALM)
Binary visual or audible indication of trouble, significant number of irregularities, or failure;

signifies a malfunction or abnormality within the communications equipment; usually classified
as minor, major, or critical.
Alarm Cutoff (ACO)
An ACO silences an office alarm.
Indication of upstream transmission span failure. In a network of tandem maintenance spans,

service-affecting failures may occur, which disrupt normal signals and cause the generation of
maintenance alarms.
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Alarm Indication
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A unique line signal sent downstream in a digital network to indicate that an upstream failure is
detected and alarmed. Signal replaces normal traffic when a maintenance alarm is activated. There
are two types: American (framed; alternating 1s and 0s) and nonstandard (unframed; all 1s).
Alarm Log
Record of recent alarm events logged for a particular etwork Element (E).
Alarm/Condition Codes*
1. Critical (CR) or (CRI).

2. In service (IS).
3. Maintenance (MAIT) or (MT).
4. Major (MAJ) or (MJ)*.
5. Manual control (ManCont).
6. Manual operation (MA).
7. Memory administration (MA)*.
8. Minor (M) or (MI)*.
9. Out of Service (OOS).
* Also referred to as Severity level or otification Code.
ALM
See Alarm (ALM).

ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown.

ALSP
AIS or LOP-Path Second.

Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)
1. Line coding format in T-1 transmission systems, whereby successive ones (marks) are
alternately inverted (sent with polarity opposite that of the preceding mark).
2. A line code that uses a ternary signal to convey binary digits; successive binary ones are
represented by signal elements normally of alternating, positive/negative polarity but equal in
amplitude, and in which binary zeros are represented by signal elements with zero amplitude
(an AT&T definition).
PRELIMINARY
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
A standards-setting, non-government organization that develops and publishes standards for

transmission codes, protocols, and high-speed languages for "voluntary" use in the United States.
AMU
Air Movement Unit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-4
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Angle Polished Connector
A method used to polish the end of a fiber optic cable.

ANSI
See American ational Standards Institute (ASI).

AOD
Automatic Offline Diagnostics.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
APC
See Angle Polished Connector (APC)

API
Application Programming Interface

Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC)
A chip built for a specific application and used by manufacturers to consolidate many chips into a
single package, reducing system board size and power consumption. Many video boards and
modems use ASICs. ASICs span Programmable Array Logic (PAL) devices, Electrically
Programmable Logic Devices (ELPDs), Field-Programmable Gate Arrays (PPGAs), standard
cell-based devices, and full custom-designed Integrated Circuits (ICs).
APS
1. Automatic Protection Switching. See Protection Switching (PS).

2. Administrative Processing System.
APSD
Automatic Power Shutdown.

APSI
Automatic Protection Switching Inhibit. See also Protection Switching (PS).

ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASIC
See Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC).

Asynchronous mode
Bytes are sent without clocking information. Each byte is identified by a start bit and terminated
by one or more stop bits.
A digital signal in which there is no common clock. Timing must be recovered from information
sent within signal.
ATAG
Autonomous Message Tag; an automatically generated tag for autonomous reports.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Asynchronous signal
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute(s)
1. Constitutes a specific property about an object.

2. The form of information items provided by the X.500 Directory Service; directory
information base consists of entries, each having one or more attributes; each attribute has a
type identifier together with one or more values.
3. MS-DOS file information, indicating whether file is read-only, hidden, or system, and
whether it has been changed since it was last backed up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
b/s
See Bits per Second (b/s).

B3ZS
1. Bipolar with 3 Zero Substitution. The line code used in DS3 transmission systems. This code
follows the bipolar rule; however, when three consecutive zeroes occur, the three zeroes are
replaced with a unique code that contains bipolar violations in a defined manner.
2. Bipolar 3-Zero Substitution (DS3/STS1). See also Bipolar Signal.
B8ZS
Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution (DS1). See Bipolar Signal.

BER
See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).

BERP
Bit Error Ratio, Path. See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).
Bidirectional Coupler (optical)
A device that combines transmit and receive optical signals within a single fiber.
Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring)
A Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET) ring network configuration in which traffic between
any two nodes flows in a single path between the two nodes. The other path around the ring is
used for protection purposes, providing high reliability. Bi-rings allow reuse of bandwidth around
the ring (unlike a unidirectional ring) but are technically much more complicated to protect.
Bidirectional Switching
PRELIMINARY
The protection switching scheme in which both paths of the duplex channel are switched to the
protection path when either fails.
BIP
See Bit Interleaved Parity- (BIP-).

BIP-N
See Bit Interleaved Parity- (BIP-).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BIPL
Bit Interleaved Parity errors, Line. See Parity Bit Interleaved Parity- (BIP-).
Bipolar Signal
1. A 3-level digital signal in which logic 1 bits are pulses (typically RZ) which alternate in
polarity, and logic 0 bits are 0 volts. The resulting waveform has a dc level of 0 volts. Also
referred to as AMI.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
2. A signal having two non-zero polarities. It must have two-state or three-state binary coding
scheme; is usually symmetrical with respect to zero amplitude.
Bipolar Violation (BPV)
The presence of two consecutive same-polarity one bits on the T carrier line.
BIPS
Bit Interleaved Parity errors, Section. See Parity Bit Interleaved Parity- (BIP-).
Bit
Binary digit; smallest unit of data in a data stream. The amount of information obtained by asking
a yes-or-no question; a computational quantity that can take on one of two values: true and false
or 0 and 1; the smallest unit of storage, sufficient to hold one bit. A bit is set if its value is true or
1, and reset or clear if its value is false or 0. Regarding setting and clearing bits: To toggle or
invert a bit changes it (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0).
Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER)
Rate at which errors occur in a digital signal divided by the number of transmitted bits. See also
Severely Errored Seconds (SES) and Signal Fail (SF).
Bit Interleaved Parity-N (BIP-N)
Method of error monitoring. If even parity is used, the transmitting equipment generates an -bit
code over a specified portion of the first bit of all -bit sequences in the covered portion of the
signal, and the second bit provides even parity over the second bits of all -bit sequences within
the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP- bits so that there is an
even number of ones in each of all -bit sequences including the BIP-.
BITS
See Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS).

Bits per Second (b/s)
The rate at which data is sent over some communication line. For example, data rate of a modem
is usually measured in kilobits per second.
Output synchronization
BKRST
Backup and Restore
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
BITSSYNC
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BLSR
Bidirectional Line-Switched Rings

BNC
A coaxial connector type commonly known by abbreviation of manufacturer Bayonet-eillConcelman

BPM
Binary Performance Monitoring

BPV
See Bipolar Violation (BPV).

BRDG
Multipoint Data Bridge

Buffer
A temporary storage device that compensates for the difference between data transmission speeds
when transferring data from one device to another
Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS)
In orth America, the clocks that provide and distribute timing to a wire line network lower
levels; known in the rest of the world as Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU).
Byte
A group of eight bits; also called an octet.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card Presence Indicator (CPI)
Indicates presence or absence of a module; provides an interrupt to the shelf processor through the
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) for modules that have a microcontroller; enables shelf
processors to detect removal and/or insertion of any module (or circuit pack) in the shelf. See also
Serial Communications Interface (SCI).
CB
Circuit Breaker (also CKB)

CBIT
Parity monitoring. Select CBIT monitoring when operating with equipment that generates CBIT
parity to monitor signal performance.
PRELIMINARY
CCT
Cross-Connect Type
CDU
Clock Distribution Unit (module)

Central Office (CO)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-8
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Typically called CO; a telephone company facility where subscriber lines are joined to switching
equipment for connecting other local and long-distance subscribers to each other; sometimes it
means wire center in which there are several switching exchanges. The overseas term for CO is
"public exchange."
CEPT
European Conference of Postal Telecommunication
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
CEV
See Controlled Environmental Vault (CEV).

CFA
Carrier Failure Alarm

CGI
Control and General Interface

Checksum
The sum of a group of data items used for error checking. Checksum is computed by the sending
computer based upon an algorithm that counts the bits going out in a packet. The check digit is
then sent to the other end as the packet tail (or trailer). As the packet is being received, the
receiving computer goes through the same algorithm. If the receiving computer goes through the
same algorithm, and if the check digit it comes up with is the same as the one received, all is well.
Otherwise, it requests the packet be sent again.
CID
1. Calling address Identification

2. Communications Interface Device
3. Connect Identification Device
4. Connection Identifier
5. Craft Interface Device
Circuit Pack
Representation of equipment that can be inserted or assigned to a slot within a shelf

CIT
1. Craft Interface Terminal (also known as user interface terminal)

2. Customer Interface Terminal
PRELIMINARY
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-9
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Cladding
1. The transparent material, usually glass, that surrounds the optical fiber core. Cladding glass
has a lower refractive index than core glass. As the light signal travels down the central core
transmission path, it naturally spreads out (modal dispersion). The cladding causes the light to
be reflected back into the central core, thereby serving to maintain the signal strength over a
long distance.
2. When referring to a metallic cable, a process of covering with a metal (usually achieved by
pressure rolling, extruding, drawing, or swagging) until a bond is achieved.
CLEI code
Common Language Equipment Identification code (assigned by Telcordia).

CLFI
Common Language Facility Identifier

CLI
Command Line Interface

CLK
Clock
CLLI
Common Language Location Identifier. Indicates the location of circuit packs at a network
element.
CMI
Coded Mark Inversion

CMOS
Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor. High-speed, low-power solid state component.

CO
See Central Office (CO).

COA
Craft Orderwire and Alarms

Code Violation
PRELIMINARY
Violation of a coding rule; for example, the Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) code is corrupted by
a Bipolar Violation (BPV).
Coding Violation (CV)
1. A violation in the coding of a signal over a digital circuit; the count of BIT-8 errors. See also
Code Violation.
2. Checksum Value. See also Checksum.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
COM
Communications port (usually COM1 or COM2, referring to communications port #1 or port #2

on a personal computer [PC]).
Command Language
A set of procedural operators with a related syntax to indicate the functions to be performed by an
operating system.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
Commands
Short-term maintenance controls such as loopback and manual switch.

Concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal Level N (STS-Nc)
An STS- Line layer signal in which the STS envelope capacities from the STS1s have been
combined to carry an STS-c synchronous payload envelope (SPE), which must be transported as
a single entity, not as several separate signals.
Concatenated Virtual Tributary (VTx-Nc)
A set of Virtual Tributaries (VTs) in which the VT envelope capacities from VTxs have been
combined to carry a VTx-c, which must be transported as a single entity, not as several separate
signals.
Concatenation
A Synchronous Optical etwork/Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SOET/SDH) mechanism for

allocating contiguous bandwidth for transport of a payload greater than Synchronous Transport
Signal Level 1 (STS-1) (the electrical equivalent Optical Carrier Level 1 [OC-1], 51.84 Mb/s; T-3
plus Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET) overhead). By using concatenation pointers,
multiple OC-1s can be linked end-to-end to provide contiguous bandwidth. The same approach is
used in higher SOET OC levels. Concatenation applications include bandwidth-intensive video
and high-speed data. See also Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET) and Synchronous Digital
Hierarchy (SDH).
Condition Type
Reported fault or event type

CONF
Configuration (An abbreviation in this document for a user and command privilege)
Configured size
System configuration size as defined in database

Configuring
The act of defining the features to be contained on a module, shelf, or system.
An underground room that houses electronic and/or optical equipment under controlled
temperature and humidity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-11
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Controlled Environmental Vault (CEV)
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CORBA
Common Object Request Broker Architecture

Correlation Tag (CTAG)
All commands issued to the network element using TL1 are given a correlation tag; response to
the command has the same correlation tag.
CPC
See Communication Processor Card (CPC).

CPE
1. C-bit Parity Error

2. Customer Premise Equipment
CPI
1. See Card Presence Indicator (CPI).

2. Common Part Interface.
CPU
Central Processing Unit (module)

CR
1. Critical. See also Alarm/Condition Codes.

2. Change Request
CRC
See Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC).

CRG
Clock Reference Generator

CRI
Critical alarm. See also Alarm/Condition Codes.

Cross-Connect
Connection point for DSX transmit/receive signals with defined characteristics.

CRS
Cross-connect.
PRELIMINARY
CRU
Clock Reference Unit

CRU
Clock Reference Unit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-12
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CT
Craft Terminal.
ctag
See correlation tag (ctag).

CV
See Coding Violation (CV).
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
CVL
Coding Violation count, Line. See Coding Violation (CV).

CVP
Coding Violation count, Path. See Coding Violation (CV).

Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)
A number derived from a block of data and stored or transmitted with the data to detect any errors
in transmission; similar to a checksum, but more complicated. A CRC is often calculated by
adding words or bytes of the data. The receiving card recalculates the CRC from the data received
and compares it to the value originally transmitted; if the values are different, it indicates a
transmission error. The CRC is called redundant because it adds no significant information to the
transmission itself.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Data Communications Channel (DCC)
Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET) overhead reserved for communication between network
elements. The channel transports signals from one data processing device location to another data
processing device location.
Data Communications Equipment (DCE)
The devices and connections of a communications network that connect the communication
circuit between data source and destination (the Data Terminal Equipment [DTE]). A modem is
the most common DCE. Before data can be transmitted over a modem, the Data Terminal Ready
(DTR) signal must be active. DTR tells the DCE that the DTE is ready to transmit and receive.
DCE and DTE are usually connected by an RS-232 serial line. It is necessary to distinguish these
two devices because their connectors must be wired differently if a "straight-through" cable (pin 1
to pin 1, pin 2 to pin 2, etc.) is used. DCE should have a female connector and should transmit on
pin two and receive on pin three. Many modems are "DTE" according to the original standard.
Data Link (DL)
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)
A device acting as the source and/or destination of data and controlling the communication
channel; includes terminals, computers, protocol converters, and multiplexers; usually connected
by means of an RS-232 serial line to Data Communication Equipment (DCE), typically a modem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-13
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
A Data Link Control Identifier (DLCI) is a channel number is attached to data frames to tell the
network how to route the data.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
It is necessary to distinguish these two device types because their connectors must be wired
differently if a "straight-through" cable (pin 1 to pin 1, pin 2 to pin 2 etc.) is used.
dB
See Decibel (dB).

DB
Database
DC
Drop-and-Continue
DCC
See Data Communications Channel (DCC).

DCE
1. See Data Communication Equipment (DCE).

2. Data Circuit-terminating Equipment
DCF
Dispersion Compensation Fiber

DCM
Dispersion Compensation Module

DCN
Data Communications etwork

DCS
Digital Cross-Connect System

DDM
Digital Diagnostics Monitoring

Decibel (dBm)
A logarithmic expression of the ratio of a given power level relative to 1 milliwatt.

Demux
Demultiplex (-er, -ing).
PRELIMINARY
DEMUX
Demultiplex direction, the tributary output signal, arriving on the optical carrier and leaving
through the tributary (electrical) outbound data stream.
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex (DWDM)
A high-speed version of Wave Division Multiplex (WDM); increases capacity of Synchronous

Optical etwork (SOET) fiber-optic transmission systems through the multiplexing of multiple
wavelengths of light; uses optical channel spacing on the order of 1.6 nm (200 GHz) or better and
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-14
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
is compatible with the International Telecommunications Union (ITU) channel plan.

DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Direct Entry
Function that enables users to interact with a network element in TL1 form.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
Dispersion
Dispersion is the process whereby optical pulses are widened as they travel along an optical fiber.
It is caused by the different wavelength components of a light signal of finite spectral width
traveling down the fiber at different velocities. The effect is a pulse at the terminating end of a
fiber that is wider than the original pulse that was transmitted. If the amount of widening is
excessive the individual pulses will not be distinguishable by the receiver. See also Chromatic
Dispersion and Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD).
DL
See Data Link (DL)

DLP
Detail Level Procedure

DMAC
1. Direct Memory Access Control

2. Direct Memory Access Controller
DNS
Domain aming System. Used in the Internet for translating names of network nodes into
addresses.
Domain
According to Management Information System (MIS) use, domain is the part of a computer
network in which data processing resources are under common control. In Microsoft
networking, a domain is a collection of computers sharing a common domain database and
security policy that is stored on a Windows T server domain controller. Each domain has a
unique name.
DPLL
Digital Phase-Locked Loop

dri
Drop
Individual connections (sometimes called nodes) on a multipoint (also called multidrop) circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-15
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Dual Ring Interconnect
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Drop Side Signal
A traffic path connecting to the tributary side of the network element; path can be electrical (such
as DS3 or STS1) or optical (such as OC3 or OC12) and can include Synchronous Optical
etwork (SOET) overhead information/access. Specific capabilities and format are product and
feature dependent.
DS0 Path-Terminating Equipment (DS0 PTE)
etwork elements that multiplex/demultiplex the DS0 channels. DS0 PTEs interpret and either
modify or create the DS0 signaling information necessary to transport the DS0 channels.
DS0, DS-0
Digital Signal, level 0. a DS0 is 64,000 bits per second (b/s) (64 kilobits), equal to one voice
conversation digitized under Pulse Code Modulation (PCM). Twenty-four DS0s (24 64 kb/s)
equal one DS1, which is T-1 or 1.544 million b/s.
DS1
Digital Signal level 1 (1.544 Mb/s). Can contain 24 DS0s.

DS3
Digital Signal level 3 (44.736 Mb/s). Can contain 28 DS01s.

DSP
1. Digital Signal Parameter

2. Digital Signal Processing
3. Domain-Specific Port
DSX
Digital signal cross-connect.

DSx
Digital Signal of an unspecified rate

DSX-1
Digital Signal, level 1 cross-connect

DSX-3
Digital Signal cross-connect point for equipment that generates or uses DS3 signals. This point
has defined waveshapes and voltage levels, in accordance with American ational Standard
T1.102.
PRELIMINARY
DTE
See Data Terminal Equipment (DTE).

DWDM
See Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex (DWDM).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DX
Duplex configuration. See Duplex (DX).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EB
Errored Blocks.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
EBC
Errored Block Count

EC
Electrical Container
EC1
1. Electrical Carrier, level 1

2. Electrical Connection Level 1, STS-1 line and section object entity (electrical STSX-1)
EDFA
See Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier

EEPROM
Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance. A partnership of electronic and high-tech associates and companies
whose mission is to promote the marketing development and competitiveness of the U.S.
high-tech industry through domestic and international policy efforts.
EMA
Element Management Application

Embedded Facility
A lower level (for example, DS1) digital signal transported in a higher level signal. Examples are
a DS1 signal embedded in a DS3, or a DS3 embedded in an STS-1 facility.
EML
1. Element Management Layer

2. Equipment Management Layer
EMS
EOC
Embedded Operations Channel

EOS
Ethernet over SOET

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-17
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Element Management System
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

Equipment (EQPT)
Electronic or mechanical devices at network nodes where end users are connected to
communications network
Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA)
The dominant method for signal amplification in long-haul lightwave transmission systems.
EDFAs differ from the normal method regenerative or electro-optic repeaters in that light does not
have to be converted to an electrical signal, amplified, then converted back to light. EDFAs are
not frequency dependent, so they allow bandwidth upgrades (within) limits without replacing the
entire transmission systems. Undersea transmission systems use EDFA technology.
Errored Second (ES)
A second during which a Coding Violation (CV) occurs.

ES
See Errored Second (ES).

ESD
Electrostatic-Sensitive Device. A circuit component, such as CMOS integrated circuit, that is

prone to damage from static electricity. See also ESS.
ESF
1. Extended Superframe format. DS1 signal framing format consisting of 24 frames. Each frame
contains a payload of 24 channels plus 1 overhead bit.
2. See also Extended Superframe (ESF).
ESL
Errored Second, Line. See Errored Second (ES)

ESP
Errored Second, Path. See Errored Second (ES)

ESS
1. Electrostatic-Sensitive Device. A circuit component, such as CMOS integrated circuit, that is

prone to damage from static electricity. Also ESS.
2. Errored Second, Section. See Errored Second (ES)
PRELIMINARY
ETSI
European Telecommunication Standards Institute

Extended Superframe (ESF)
One of two possible framing patterns for a DS1 signal. ESF has an extra channel that can pass
synchronization messages; the Superframe (SF) cannot.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FBE
Frame Bit Error. An error on an incoming DS3 signal detected and reported by the performance
monitor.
FC
Failure Count
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
FC/PC
A specific type of fiber-optic cable connector.

FCC
Federal Communications Commission

FCP
Failed Count-Path
FDDI
Fiber Distributed Data Interface

FDL
1. Facility Data Link

2. See Frame Data Link (FDL).
FE
1. Far-End
2. Fast Ethernet (10/100 Mbps.)
FEAC
Far-End Alarm and Control. Channel bit used in C-bit formatting for status and control
communications.
FEBE
Far-End Block Error. Channel bit used in C-bit formatting for performance monitoring event.
FEC
Forward Error Correction

FERF
Far-End Receive Failure
Frame Errored Seconds

FFP
Fast Facility Protection. Refers to line facility groups. It also refers to path facility groups which
constitute preferred or alternate paths.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-19
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
FES
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FI
Fault Isolation
Fiber Optic Cable
The core of the fiber optic cable is made of very pure glass; it is surrounded by four protective
layers, given here from the core out: cladding, buffer, dielectric strength member, and the
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) subunit jacket.
Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA)
Used on some cards to modify hardware operation through software, rather than physically
changing the hardware on the card; logic network can be programmed into the device after its
manufacture. An FPGA consists of an array of logic elements. Most FPGAs are reprogrammable
because their logic functions and interconnect are defined by Random Access Memory (RAM)
cells; others can be programmed only once, retaining programming permanently. FPGAs have
enabled development of logic emulators. See also Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD).
Fixed Stuff (R-Bits/Bytes)
Fixed stuff (R) bits and bytes compensate for the differences between the bandwidth available in
the STS1 and Virtual Tributary (VT) synchronous payload envelopes and the bandwidth required
for the actual payload mappings (for example, DS1, DS1C, DS2, DS3, etc.). They facilitate
interworking with existing transmission systems or allow interworking between fixed and floating
VTs. R-bits and bytes have no defined value. The receiver ignores the value of these bits/bytes
(except for BIP-8 calculation/verification).
FLC
First Level Controller

FLT
Fault
FM
Fault Manager
Format
Refers to basic structure and arrangement or order of elements in a command or data.

FPGA
1. Fused Programmable Gate Array

2. See also Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA).
PRELIMINARY
Frame Data Link (FDL)
A message channel in the overhead of a DS1 Extended Superframe (ESF) signal that can relay
clock-quality information.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol. An IP-based file transfer protocol.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-20
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FTS
Fiber Transmission System

Full Duplex
1. Independent, simultaneous communication in both directions between two locations.

2. Standard 2-way connection.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Gateway Communications Functions
Functions to facilitate operations communications between two communicating entities across

dissimilar subnetworks. Examples include concentration, message routing and relaying (etwork
Layer), and application layer protocol conversion and/or message translation. See also Mediation
Functions.
Gb, Gb/s
Gigabits, Gigabits per second

GB, GB/s
Gigabytes, Gigabytes per second

GbE
See Gigabit Ethernet (GigE)

GFP
Generic Framing Procedure. Protocol for mapping packet data into an octet-synchronous transport
such as SOET.
GFP
Generic Framing Procedure

Gigabit Ethernet (GigE)
Input conditioning performed to map Ethernet frames into SOET payload structures.
GigE
See Gigabit Ethernet (GigE)

GND (or Gnd)
Ground
GNE
Gateway etwork Element
Grade of Service
Graphical User Interface (GUI)
This interface supports applications that consist of a series of rectangular presentation regions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-21
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
GOS
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
called windows. Each window displays another application.

GRD
General Release Document

Grooming
The process of moving traffic from one point to another.

Growth
Increasing system port capacity

GUI
See Graphical User Interface (GUI).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Half duplex
Standard 1-way connection

Half-Duplex Transmission
A circuit designed for data transmission in both directions, but not at the same time. Telex is an
example of a half-duplex system, as is speaking on with most speaker-phones. Compare with
Full-Duplex Transmission.
Head End
The point where the line overhead is inserted. (Tail end describes the point where the line
overhead is terminated.) A central control device required within some Local Area etwork/Area
etwork (LA/MA) systems to provide such centralized functions as remodulation, retiming,
message accountability, contention control, diagnostic control, and access.
HLDOVER
See Holdover.
HO
High Order, generally referred to as STS-1 level virtually concatenated signals.

Holdover
A mode in which an oscillator that was previously tracking a reference attempts to maintain the
last-known frequency instead of continuing to track. Transition to Holdover could occur for a
variety of reasons, including failure on a reference or a manual switch.
HS
PRELIMINARY
High Speed
Hz
Hertz
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-22
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I/O
See Input/Output (I/O).

IBFEC
In-Band Forward Error Correction
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
IC
Integrated Circuit
ID
Identification
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IGFET
Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistors

IL
Insertion Loss
ILA
In-Line Amplifier
IMP
Integrated Multi-protocol
In Service (IS)
An equipment module is available for use by the system. (It may be online or offline.) An
equipped module is either IS or Out of Service (OOS).
In-Service Growth
A feature that enables service providers to install one optical channel initially, then upgrade to
additional optical channels or a mix of data rates. Additional modules may be added one at a time
while the system is in service.
Input/Output (I/O)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-23
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Two of the three computer functions; the third is processing. I/O describes the interrelated tasks of
providing information to the computer and providing the results of processing to the user. I/O
devices include keyboards (input) and printers (output). A disk drive is an input and an output
device because it provides information to the computer and receives information from the
computer.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Interleave
1. Transmission of pulses from two or more digital sources in time-division sequence over a
single path.
2. A data communication technique, used in conjunction with error-correcting codes, to reduce
the number of undetected error bursts. In the interleaving process code symbols are reordered
before transmission so that any two successive code symbols are separated by |-1 (| is called
the degree of interleaving). Upon reception, interleaved code symbols are reordered into their
original sequence, effectively spreading or randomizing errors (in time) to enable more
complete correction by a random error-correcting code.
3. Refers to the way a computer writes to and reads from a hard disk.
Intermediate Reach (IR)
Refers to optical sections from a few kilometers (km) to approximately 15 km.

Intermediate System (IS)
Refers to a system that originates and terminates traffic, and forwards traffic to other systems; an
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) term.
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS)
An Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) link-state hierarchical routing protocol, based on

DECnet Phase V routing, whereby intermediate systems (routers) exchange routing information
based on a single metric to determine network topology.
Internet Protocol (IP)
Part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) family of protocols

describing software that tracks the Internet address of nodes, routes outgoing messages, and
recognizes incoming messages; used in gateways to connect networks of Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI) network Level 3 and above. See also Internet Protocol (IP) Address and
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
Internet Protocol (IP) Address
A unique, 32-bit number for a specific transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP)
host on the Internet; normally printed in dotted decimal form (for example, 128.126.50.224).
When a domain is assigned a group of numbers by the Internet central registry, it can house one or
several domains and/or hosts. Some IP addresses are reserved for broadcasts in respective
domains. See also Domain.
IOC
Input/Output Conditioner
PRELIMINARY
IOO
OS-OS Interface
IP
1. In Progress
2. See Internet Protocol (IP).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-24
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IPCP
Internet Protocol Control Protocol

IR
See Intermediate Reach (IR).

IS
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
1. See In Service (IS).

2. See Intermediate System (IS).
IS-ANR
In Service-Abnormal
IS-IS
See Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS).

IS-NR
In Service-ormal
ISLTD
Isolated, fully
ISO
International Standards Organization

ISU
In-Service Upgrade
ITU
International Telecommunications Union (replaces CCITT)

ITU-T
International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications

IXL
Index Task List

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
JFET
Junction Field Effect Transistors
Relative phase change between data time slots and clock (timing) pulses. Results in bit errors and,
in voice circuits, noise in telephone circuits. Jitter is cumulative and is primary limitation to
maximum system length, including terminals and repeaters, of a digital transmission system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-25
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Jitter
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
KAM
Keep Alive Message

KAS
Keep Alive Signal

kb/s
Kilobits per second

kHz
KiloHertz
km
Kilometers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L1
Level 1
L2
1. Level 1 (controller).
2. Layer 2 (Ethernet switching).
L3
Level 3 (controller functions).

LAN
Local Area etwork

LAPB
Line Access Procedure, Balanced

LAPD
Link Access Procedure, D-channel

LAPS
Link Access Procedure for SDH

LBO
PRELIMINARY
See Line Buildout (LBO)

LC

LCAS
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-26
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LCI
Logical Channel Identifier

LCN
1. Local Communications etwork, a Local Area etwork (LA).

2. Logical Channel umber.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
LCP
Link Control Protocol

LD
Line Driver
LDB
Loop Detection Buffer

LDCC
Line Data Communications Channel

LEC
Local Exchange Carrier

LED
Light-Emitting Diode
LIF
Low-speed Interface
Limited mode
System operating mode that allows access to a limited number of commands. It is primarily used
for database restoration.
Line
A transmission medium, together with the associated Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE),

required to provide the means of transporting information between two consecutive
line-terminating network elements: One originates the line signal, and the other terminates the line
signal. In SOET, the line envelope is a subset of the section envelope.
Line Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Code
Line Buildout (LBO)
Equalization pad or artificial line network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-27
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
A code generated by Section-Terminating Equipment (STE) upon loss of input signal, loss of
frame, or equipment failure. Line AIS signal maintains operation of downstream regenerators and
prevents generation of unnecessary alarms. At the same time, data and orderwire communication
is retained between the regenerators and downstream Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE).
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Line Group
Group of Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET) signals at an Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM)

connection.
Line Side Signal
A signal suitable for transmission over outside plant facilities or across an administrative
boundary.
Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE)
etwork Elements (Es) that originate and/or terminate line (OC-) signals; LTE includes Es
that originate and/or terminate line signals. LTEs originate, access, modify, and/or terminate the
transport overhead.
Linear Add-Drop Multiplexer (LADM)
etwork element in a linear network that provides access to all , or some subset M (M is a
standard hierarchical level v), of the STS line signals contained within an OC- optical channel.
STS signals are added to (inserted) and/or dropped from (extracted) the OC- signal as it passes
through Add-Drop Multiplexer (ADM).
List Box
Displays a list of choices in the application window of the 1301 etwork Manager (M). A scroll
bar is provided if the box contains more choices than the box can hold. The list box can be a
single- or multiple-selection type.
LMF
Loss of Multiframe
LO
Low Order, generally referring to VT1.5 level virtually concatenated signals.

LOA
Loss of Activity
LOC
Loss of Clock
Location
The physical location (site) of a network device.

LOF
PRELIMINARY
Loss of Frame
Long Reach (LR)
Refers to optical sections of approximately 25 kilometers or more in length and is applicable to all
Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET) rates. Compare with Short Reach (SR).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-28
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loopback
A maintenance condition that redirects normal input to output, or vice versa; consists of a
diagnostic test in which the transmitted signal is returned to the sending device after passing
through a data communications link or network, thereby allowing a technician (or built-in
diagnostic circuit) to compare the returned signal with the transmitted signal and determine what
is wrong. Loopbacks are often done by excluding one piece of equipment after another,
eliminating non-problematic equipment to isolate a problem.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
LOP
Loss of Pointer
LOS
Loss of Signal
LPF
Low-Pass Filter
LPR
Light Power Received

LPRN
See Light Power Received ormalized (LPR)

LPT
Light Power Transmitted

LPTA
Line/Path Terminating ASIC

LR
1. Line Receiver
2. See also Long Reach (LR).
LTE
1. Line-Terminating Element
2. See Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-29
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
3. Lite-terminating equipment (Synchronous Optical etwork [SOET]). Asynchronous

Transfer Mode (ATM) equipment, terminating a communications facility using a SOET Lite
Transmission Convergence (TC) layer (usually reserved for end user or Local Area etwork
[LA] equipment); does not implement some of the maintenance functions used in long-haul
networks such as termination of path, line, and section overhead.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAC
1. Memory Arbitration Circuit

2. Media Access Control. A standard data link layer address that is required for every port of
device that connects to a LA.
MAJ
Major
MAN
Manual operation
MAU
Medium Attachment Unit

MB
1. Management Information Base

2. MegaByte(s)
Mb/s
Megabits per second

MD
Mediation Device
MDL
Maintenance Data Link. Three bits used as a 28.2 kb/s terminal-to-terminal link identifier. Part of
the overhead in the C-bit parity format.
Mediation Functions
Usually consist of gateway communications functions, but can include information processing
functions. When the two functions are combined, they are often contained in a stand-alone
mediation device (MD) or packaged as an added module to an etwork Element (E) or
equipment frame. Gateway communications functions often exist alone in a gateway E or
intermediate E.
MHz
MegaHertz
PRELIMINARY
MIB
Management Information Base

MIC
1. Module Interface Circuit

2. Module Interface Controller
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-30
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MIN
Minor
MJ
Major
MN
Minor
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
Modem
Modulator/Demodulator
Modulator/Demodulator (Modem)
A communications device that enables the computer to transmit information over a telephone line.
Module
An independent assembly of electronic components with some distinct function. A module might
contain one, two, three, or more cards. In the past, there was nearly always one card in each
module; therefore, "card" might be used when "module" was actually meant. Even in the case of a
module that contains only one card, the module includes a front panel, ejector handles, etc. that
are mounted on the card. See also Card and Circuit Packs.
MOP
Method of Procedure
MPU
Microprocessor Unit
MRU
Maximum Receive Unit

MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures

MTU
Maximum Transmit Unit

MTX
Matrix module
Multiplex (MUX, Mx)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-31
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Multiplex direction, the tributary input signal arriving on tributary interface (electrical) and being
multiplexed up onto optical signal, then leaving system. Combining several signals for
transmission on some shared medium; signals are combined at the transmitter by a multiplexer
(MUX) and split up at the receiver by a demultiplexer (DEMUX). The communications channel
can be shared between the independent signals in one of several different ways: Time Division
Multiplexing (TDM), Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM), and Code Division Multiplexing
(CDM). If the inputs take turns to use the output channel (TDM), the output bandwidth need be
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
no greater than the maximum bandwidth of any input. If many inputs are active simultaneously,
the output bandwidth must be at least as great as the total bandwidth of all simultaneously active
inputs. In this case the multiplexer is also known as a concentrator.
MUX
See Multiplex (MUX, Mx).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NA
1. ot Alarmed or o Alarm

2. ot Applicable
3. ot Available, in reference to performance monitoring parameter validity flags.
NAD
etwork Access Domain

NAS
orth American Standard

NE
1. ear End. See also ED.

2. etwork Element. Can be a switching E or a transport E. Cross-connects are transport
Es.
3. See also etwork Element (E).
NE Configuration
The physical components within a etwork Element (E).

NE Type
The model number of a specific etwork Element (E).

NEBS
etwork Equipment-Building System typical equipment requirements (Telcordia GR-63).

NEC
ational Electric Code

NEL
PRELIMINARY
etwork Element Layer

NEND
ear End
NETADMIN
etwork Administrator (abbreviation in this document for a user and command privilege)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-32
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Network
Database representation of resources allocated to a secondary user. etwork may also refer to
physical elements of a communications system; equipment, transmission facilities, and end users.
Network element
A generic piece of equipment (such as a digital cross-connect) that represents a single function in
the system
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
Network Element (NE)
Configurable transmission controller used as a multiplexer, access node, or Add/Drop multiplexer.

Network entity
Any of the physical devices that make up the communications network

Network facility
Equipment used to connect individual Es

Network resource
All physical devices, including end equipment, transmission facilities, and end users
Network Service Access Point (NSAP)
The point at which the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) network service is made available to
a transport entity. SAPs are identified by OSI network addresses. The SAP is a generic
standard for a network address consisting of 20 octets. ATM has specified E.164 for public
network addressing and the SAP address structure for private network addresses.
NLAN
etwork Local Area etwork

nm
anometer
NM
etwork Management or etwork Manager

NMA
1. etwork Monitoring and Analysis

2. etwork Management Application
NOC
etwork Operation Center
A point where transmission lines originate, interconnect, switch, or terminate. Generally consists
of one or more pieces of equipment and is connected to other nodes via network facilities.
Typically provides switching capabilities, multiplexing capabilities, end-point termination or
origination, or other similar networking services. A point in the network where a network element
is physically located (such as a digital cross-connect system)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-33
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Node
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Nonblocking
A feature that allows any input port to be connected to any output port. onblocking switch paths
ensure that a connection can always be established between any two idle ports without
rearranging existing connections.
Nonregenerative
A type of optical amplification whereby the optical signal is amplified without being converted to
an electrical signal and then fed directly to the transmission line (as opposed to regenerative
amplification where the optical signal is first converted into an electrical signal, amplified,
converted back into an optical signal, and then fed to the transmission line).
Nonrevertive
As applied to protection switching, means that service is not automatically reestablished to

previously active device when failure is corrected.
NORM
ORMal
North American AIS
The accepted Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) for use in orth American etwork, consisting of
alternating 1010 pattern with valid framing and fixed overhead bit content. (Also called Standard
AIS.)
Not Alarmed (NA)
A condition noted on the alarm manager screen, but does not cause an alarm situation to be
recorded.
Not Reported (NR)
A condition that is not reported on any screen.

NOTMOUT
o Time Out (a user privilege described in this document)

NR
1. ormal
2. ot Reported
NRZ
onreturn to Zero
PRELIMINARY
NSA
onservice-Affecting
NSAP
See etwork Service Access Point (SAP).

NTE
etwork Terminal Equipment

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-34
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NTP
etwork Time Protocol

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
O-LAN
Office LA
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
O-SNCP
Optical Sub-etwork Connection Protection

OA
Optical Amplifier
OADM
Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

OAM&P
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning

OAS
Optical Amplifier Section (per ITU-T G.681)

OC
Optical Carrier
OC-N
Optical Carrier, level (for high-speed drops)

OC1
Optical Carrier, level 1 (51.84 Mb/s)

OC12

OC12c
Optical Carrier, level 12 (622.08 Mb/s) Concatenated

OC192
Optical Carrier, level 192 (9.953 Gb/s)

OC3
Optical Carrier, level 3 (155.52 Mb/s) Concatenated

OC48
Optical Carrier, level 48 (2.488 Gb/s)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-35
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
OC3c
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OC48c
Optical Carrier, level 48 (2.488 Gb/s) Concatenated

OCM
Optical Transceiver
OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturer

OFA
Optical Fiber Amplification

OH
OverHead, Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET)

OID
Object Identifier
OOBFEC
Out-of-Band Forward Error Correction

OOF
Out of Frame
OOFP
Out of Frame-Path
OOS
See Out of Service (OOS).

OOS-MA-AS
Out-of-Service-Memory administration-Assigned
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)
The only internationally accepted framework of standards for communication between different
systems made by different vendors. The primary intent for OSI is to create an open systems
networking environment in which any vendor computer system, connected to any network, can
freely share data with any other computer system on that network or a linked network. OSI was
developed by the International Standards Organization. Most of the dominant communications
protocols used have a structure based on the OSI model.
PRELIMINARY
Operations Support System (OSS)
Methods and procedures (mechanized or not) that directly support the telecommunications
infrastructure daily operation. The average Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) has hundreds of OSSs,
including automated systems supporting order negotiation, order processing, line assignment, line
testing, and billing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-36
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Operator Action
An operator-initiated action that interferes with the normal mechanism within the product for
response to detected conditions, such as forced switching, inhibited switching, or taking a
working module out of service.
OPS
Operations Processing System
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
Optical Carrier Level 1 (OC-1)
Optical signal that results from an optical conversion of an electrical STS-1 signal; this signal
forms the basis of the interface.
Optical signal produced by converting an STS-12 from an electrical signal to an optical signal.
Optical Carrier Level N (OC-N)
Optical signal resulting from an optical conversion of an electrical STS- signal.

Optical Modules
Elements of the system that provide the photonic interface for either transmit or receive functions.
Optical Pulse Distortion/Dispersion
The property of an optical fiber that causes optical signals passing through the fiber to be
bandwidth limited. A received light pulse will be wider than that, that was transmitted; the amount
of this distortion increases with the fiber length.
ORB
Object Request Broker

Order Wire, Orderwire (OW)
2. Equipment and circuit providing a telephone company the means to establish voice contact
between central office and carrier repeater locations.
3. A Synchronous Optical etwork/Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SOET/SDH) term for a
connection request; consists of one octet contained within the Section Overhead (SOH).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-37
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
1. A circuit used by telephone personnel for fixing, installing, and removing phone lines.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OS
1. Operations System (Also called OSS.)

2. Operating System, as in HP-UX, DOS, or Windows 2000
OSC
1. See Oscillator (OSC).

2. Optical Supervisory Channel.
Oscillator (OSC)
1. A device for generating an analog test signal.

2. An electronic circuit that creates a single-frequency signal.
OSDB
Operations System Database

OSI
See Open Systems Interconnection (OSI).

OSL
Output Subscription Level

OSLINK
Operations System LIK has failed (X.25 link)

OSMINE
Operations Systems Modifications for the Integration of etwork Elements.

OSNR
Optical Signal-to-oise Ratio

OSPORT
Operations System Port

OSS
1. See Operations Support System (OSS) (Also called OS.)

2. Operating System Surveillance
OTDR
PRELIMINARY
Optical Time Domain Reflectometer

OTN
Optical Transport etwork
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-38
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OTS
1. Object Transport Service

2. Optical Transmission Section (per ITU-T G.681)
3. Optical Transport System, a dense WDM system (per AT&T RFP)
Out of Service (OOS)
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
1. A status indication that function is not being performed by a given circuit pack and it can be
removed for maintenance.
2. An equipped module is OOS when unavailable for system use; module may be OOS for
operator action, equipment failure, diagnostic testing, or family of equipment not carrying
traffic. See also SOS (Status, ot currently Out of Service).
3. Equipment or channel not carrying traffic.
4. Status indicating that traffic is not being processed by a given module and that the module can
be removed for maintenance.
5. Designation for an inactive address or function.
Overhead
Anything that is not traffic in a digital bit stream. Traffic is the payload, or information being
carried by signal. Overhead is that portion of signal that carries information about timing and
maintenance of signal, but does not carry any portion of information originally sent and meant to
be received at the far end.
OW
See Order Wire, Orderwire (OW).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Packet Switching
A communications paradigm in which packets (messages or fragments of messages) are

individually routed between nodes, with no previously established communication path. Packets
are routed to their destination through the most expedient route (as determined by some routing
algorithm). ot all packets traveling between the same two hosts, even those from a single
message, will necessarily follow the same route. The destination computer reassembles the
packets into their appropriate sequence. Packet switching optimizes available bandwidth use in a
network and minimizes latency. See also X.25.
PAD
Packet Assembler/Disassembler
An element of a command, which further defines the object of the command or provides data
needed for proper command execution. See individual command descriptions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-39
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Parameter
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parity Check
A process for detecting whether bits of data (parts of characters) have been altered during
transmission of that data. Data are transmitted as a stream of bits with values of one or zero; for
example, each character of data composed of seven bits has another bit added to it. The value of
that bit is chosen so that either the total number of one bits is always even if Even Parity error
correction is to be obeyed, or always odd if Odd Parity correction is chosen.
Path
1. A path at a given bit rate is a logical connection between the point at which a standard frame
format for the signal is assembled and the point at which the standard frame format for the
signal is disassembled.
2. The route a telecommunications signal follows through a circuit or through the air.
Path command
Any valid connect or disconnect command directed to matrix

Path Overhead (POH)
Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET) path overhead assigned to and transported with the
payload until payload is demultiplexed; used for functions necessary to transport the payload, for
example, end-to-end network management. These functions include parity check and trace
capability. POH is not implemented in SOET Lite. See also STS Path Overhead (STS POH).
Payload Pointer
The pointer that indicates the location of the beginning of the Synchronous Payload Envelope
(SPE).
PBIT
Parity monitoring. Select PBIT monitoring to monitor performance on signals other than CBIT
parity. PBIT is corrected at each DS3 level; therefore, it provides only error monitoring from DS3
electrical interface to DS3 interface.
PCM
1. See Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).

2. PCM is also slang for the Sony F1 format, which stores PCM digital audio on videotape.
PCN
Product Change otification.

PDH
PRELIMINARY
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDN
Public Data etwork
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-40
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PDU
Power Distribution Unit.

Performance Monitoring (PM)
Reports and analyzes deviations from defined parameters, detecting any signal degradation that
could lead to a service-affecting failure; refers to actions that monitor signal integrity and quality
(such as counting parity errors in Synchronous Optical etwork [SOET] equipment) and
equipment impairments (such as laser degrade). ominally includes reporting of values recorded
during monitoring and sending them over a digitally multiplexed transmission channel.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC)
A virtual circuit that is permanently established, saving the time associated with circuit
establishment and tear-down.
PES
Parity Errored Second

Phase-Locked Loop (PLL)
A circuit containing a voltage-controlled oscillator whose phase or frequency can be "steered" to

keep it in sync with a reference source. A PLL circuit is generally used to lock onto and
"up-convert" the frequency of a stable source.
PIB
Product Information Bulletin.

PID
1. Password Identifier
2. Path Identification
3. Product Identifier
Pigtail
A length of optical fiber with one end terminated at a connector and the other end attached to a
light source or detector. The fiber couples light from a source to a connectorized fiber cable or
from a fiber cable to a detector.
PIN
1. Positive Intrinsic egative. Type of photodetector used to sense lightwave energy then to
convert it to electrical signals.
2. A type of semiconductor diode that has a 3-layer structure composed of P-type, intrinsic type,
and -type material.
Pointer Justification Count

PJN
Pointer Justification egative

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-41
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
PJC
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PJP
Pointer Justification Positive

PLD
Programmable Logic Device

PLL
Phase-Locked Loop. See Phase-Locked Loop (PLL).

PLM
Payload Mismatch.
PM
See Performance Monitoring (PM).

PMC
Process Monitory and Control

PMD
Polarization Mode Dispersion

PMV
Performance Monitoring Visualization

PNM
Physical etwork Manager

POH
See Path Overhead (POH).

Point of Presence (POP)
1. A physical place within a Local Access and Transport Area (LATA) where a long-distance
carrier or a cellular provider interfaces with the network of the Local Exchange Carrier
(LEC), also called the local telephone company.
2. The point at which the LEC terminates subscriber circuits for cellular phone call,
long-distance dial-up phone call, or leased-line communications.
3. A meet point where Internet Service Providers (ISPs) exchange traffic and routes.
PRELIMINARY
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
A communictions protocol; the protocol defined in RFC 1661, the Internet standard for
transmitting network layer datagrams (for example, IP packets) over serial point-to-point links.
PPP is designed to operate over asynchronous connections and bit-oriented synchronous systems.
It can configure connections to a remote network dynamically and test that the link is usable. PPP
can be configured to encapsulate different network layer protocols by using appropriate etwork
Control Protocol (CP).
Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-42
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Identified around 1990, PMD might become a limiting issue in optical span design now that data
rates are going higher (10 Gb/s and 40 Gb/s), and spans are getting longer. PMD is the dispersion
of an optical signal, caused by the different polarization modes of the optical signal traveling
down a fiber at slightly different velocities. The amount of PMD is statistical in nature and varies
randomly with time. PMD is independent of chromatic dispersion, so a span can be PMD-limited
in distance even in the absence of chromatic dispersion. Due to the random nature of the physical
causes of PMD, it is more difficult to be compensated for, as chromatic dispersion, but newer
techniques are being developed. See also Chromatic Dispersion.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
POP
See Point of Presence (POP).

Port
1. A physical connection on a network element that has a specified rate and type of physical
attachment; a connection or socket on the computer. Ports are used for connecting devices
(cables, modems, printers, monitors) to a PC, then sending information from the computer to
the devices. Serial ports (COM 1-COM 4) and parallel ports (LPT1, LPT2) are the most
commonly used.
2. An interface point between the system and its external environment. Can be physical, logical,
or both.
PP
Pointer Procesor
ppm
Parts per million

PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol. See Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

PPS
Path Protection Switching. See Protection Switching (PS).

PRBS
Pseudo Random Binary Sequence

PRC
Primary Reference Clock

PRI
1. Primary (alarm)
PRM
Performance Report Messages
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-43
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
2. Protection Release Inhibited
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PROT
PROTection
Protection Channel Access (PCA)
The tributary signals carried by the protection channel when it is offline (i.e., not protecting the
working traffic). It is lower priority and will be dropped in favor of the working traffic in the
event of a working channel failure.
Protection Switch Count (PSC)
The Performance Monitoring (PM) parameter used to count the number of protection switches for
a protection group.
Protection Switching (PS)
The automatic etwork Element (E) function that provides recovery of traffic in the event of a
network or equipment failure. Protection may be an individual E function (as in unidirectional
linear protection or in a unidirectional ring) or a network function (as in bidirectional linear
protection or in a bidirectional ring).
Protection Switching Duration (PSD)
This parameter measures the total time, in seconds, for which service was removed from a given
(nonprotection) line.
Protection Switching Line, Counts
This parameter measures the number of times service switches from a particular working line to a
protection line.
Protocol
A set of rules that govern the interaction of processes or applications in a system or network
PROV
Provisioning (a user and command privilege described in this document)

Proxy
Provides protocol conversion between TL1 commands and Common Management Information
Service Element (CMISE) commands.
PRS
Primary Reference System

ps/nm
PRELIMINARY
Picoseconds per nanometer

PSA
Power Supply Alarm

PSC
See Protection Switch Count (PSC).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-44
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PSCC
Processor Serial Control Circuit

PSD
Protection Switching Duration

PSN
Packet-Switched etwork. See Packet Switching. See also X.25.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
PST
Primary State
PSU
Power Supply Unit

PSW
Protect Switch
PTE
Path-Terminating Equipment. See also DS0 Path-Terminating Equipment (DS0 PTE).

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)
A method by which an audio signal is represented as digital data. Virtually all digital audio
systems use PCM.
PVC
1. Permanent Virtual Channel

2. See Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC).
3. Permanent Virtual Connection (Asynchronous Transfer Mode [ATM] terminology)
4. Polyvinyl Chloride
PWR
1. Power
2. Power converter
PWR1D5/PWRC1D5
Power Supply
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
QoS
QRS
Quasi-Random Signal
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-45
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Quality of Service
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
QRSF
Quasi-Random Signal, Framed

QRSS
Quasi-Random Signal Source. Signals used for testing digital circuits, particularly DS-1 (for
example, T-1) circuits.
QRSU
Quasi-Random Signal, Unframed

QTY
Quantity
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RA
Return Authorization
Rack
An assembly of shelves within a standard set of vertical mounting posts or rails (called rack
channels).
RADM
Ring Add-Drop Multiplexer

RADMAP
Remote Alarm Display Map

RAM
See Random Access Memory (RAM).

Random Access Memory (RAM)
The working memory of the card; memory used for storing data temporarily while working on it,
running application programs, etc. "Random access" means that any RAM area can be accessed
directly and immediately. RAM is called volatile memory; information in RAM will disappear if
the power is switched off before it is saved to disk. RAM is used on all downloadable cards to run
the application loads of the cards.
RCC
Relay Contact-closure Control

RCV
PRELIMINARY
Receive module
RDI
Remote Defect Indication

RDU
Rack Distribution Unit (module)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-46
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Redundancy, Redundant
1. That part of any message that may be eliminated without losing important information.
2. Having one or more "backup" systems available in case of failure of the main system.
Remote Defect Indication-Line (RDI-L)
An indication returned to a transmitting Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE) upon receipt of a line

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) code or detection of an incoming line failure at the receiving LTE.
(Formerly Line Far-end Receive Failure [FERF].)
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
Revertive
Service is automatically restored to the primary device after failure is corrected.

RFI
1. Radio Frequency Interference.

2. Remote Failure Indicator.
RFS
Remote File Server

RI
Remote Inventory
Ring
A network where the network nodes are interconnected by means of a circular route that may be
broken at any one point without permanently disrupting traffic. Rings are either unidirectional
(uniring) or bidirectional (bi-ring).
Ring Add-Drop Multiplexer (RADM)
etwork element in a ring network that provides access to all , or some subset M (M is a
standard hierarchical level v ), of the STS line signals contained within an OC- optical
channel. STS signals are added to (inserted) and/or dropped from (extracted) the OC- signal as it
passes through the ADM. Ring ADMs may be either unidirectional (uniring) or bidirectional
(bi-ring).
RIP
Routing Information Protocol

Route Diversity
RPC
1. Redundant Power Converter

2. Remote Procedure Call
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-47
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
A network configuration that provides two connection paths between two points, each physically
separated from the other except at the terminal end points. This method retains service over one of
the routes if the other route is broken (such as when a cable is cut). A route diversity application
can be built using a ring network or a linear network as a basis.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RS-232
An Electronic Industry Association (EIA) data communications standard using serial binary data
interchange standard applicable to interconnection of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE); the most
common asynchronous serial line standard; the EIA equivalent of ITU-T V.24 and V.28. RS-232
specifies connector gender and pin use, but not their physical type (RS-423 specifies the electrical
signals.); 25-way D-type connectors are common but often only three wires are connected: one
ground (pin seven) and one for data in each direction; other pins are mostly related to hardware
handshaking between sender and receiver and to carrier detection on modems, inoperative
circuits, busy conditions etc. The standard classifies equipment as either Data Communications
Equipment (DCE) or Data Terminal Equipment (DTE).
RS-232C
An Electronic Industry Association (EIA) standard applicable to interconnection of Data Terminal

Equipment (DTE) and Data Communication Equipment (DCE) using serial binary data
interchange.
RSP
Rack Status Panel (module)

RT
Remote Terminal
RTC
Real-Time Clock
RTN
Return
RTU
Remote Test Unit

RX
Receive, receiver
RX+TX
Receiver plus Transceiver

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SA
PRELIMINARY
Service-Affecting
SABM
Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode

SAM
System Administrator Manager
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-48
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SAN
Storage Area etwork

SAS
Severe errored frame/Alarm indication signal (SEF/AIS) Second

SB
Short Band (SB). See also Conventional-Band (C-Band).
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
SBI
Serial Bus Interface

SBS
Stimulated Brillouin Scattering

SCSI
Small Computer System Interface. A bus that links the optical and hard disks to the processor.
SCU
Stratum Clock Unit

SDH
See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).

SDMA
Serial Direct Memory Access

SDTH
Signal Degrade Threshold

SEA
Supported Entity Outage

Section
The portion of a transmission facility (including terminating points) between a terminal network
element and a regenerator or between two regenerators. A terminating point is the point after
signal regeneration, where Performance Monitoring (PM) is or can be done. In Synchronous
Optical etwork (SOET), the section envelope encompasses the line envelope. See also
Synchronous Payloads.
Section-Terminating Equipment (STE)
SEF
Severely Errored Frame
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-49
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
etwork elements that terminate the Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET) physical and
section layers. STE is either a regenerator or part of a Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE). STEs
interpret and either modify or create the section SOET overhead.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SEFS
Severely Errored Frame Seconds

SEMF
Synchronous Equipment Management Function

Seq
Sequence
Service Condition
A data path can be selected as In Service (IS), which is the normal operational state, or
Out-of-Service (OOS) condition, which disables protection switching and alarm and Performance
Monitoring (PM) functions. An OOS data path may or may not be able to carry test traffic,
depending on system configuration.
SESCP
Severely Errored Seconds-CP-bit Path

SESL
Severely Errored Seconds-Line

SESP
Severely Errored Seconds-Path

Session
1. A logical network connection between two addressable units for the exchange of data.
2. A connection between a user and the etwork Element (E). One user can have multiple
sessions. All provisioning operations, queries, and autonomous reports are transported
between the E and user through a session.
SETG
Synchronous Equipment Timing Group

SETS
Synchronous Equipment Timing Source

Severely Errored Seconds (SES)
PRELIMINARY
Contains more than Coding Violations (CVs). The value of with frame size and bit rate
should be chosen to correspond to a Bit Error Ratio (BER) of approximately 10-3, assuming
errors are randomly distributed. This count may be used to determine problems for particular
types of services and/or as a measure of facility outage duration.
SF
1. See Signal Fail (SF).

2. See Superframe (SF).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-50
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFP
Small Form Factor Plug-in

Shelf
Basic rack assembly unit; contains subassemblies (usually circuit packs, also referred to as
modules).
Short Band
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
The shorter wavelength half of the Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA) amplification window
that is approximately 1530 nm to 1543 nm.
Short Reach (SR)
A Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET) term; refers to optical sections of approximately 2

kilometers or less in length. The sections may be interoffice or intraoffice. Compare with Long
Reach (LR).
SID
1. System Identification. A five-digit number assigned to identify the particular cellular carrier
from whom one is obtaining service; identifies "home" system.
2. System Identifier. An alphanumeric designator that uniquely identifies a particular system or
site within the network.
3. Site Identifier
SID/NSAP
See System Identification/etwork Service Access Point (SID/SAP).

Signal Fail (SF)
1. Also known as Loss of Signal (LOS), detection of a LOS, Loss of Frame (LOF), or Loss of
Pointer (LOP) on the lines or on tributaries (for example, OC12s) connected to the system.
2. Threshold value used to compare calculated Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER) value with SF
threshold. If BER value is less than SF threshold, an Excessive BER (EXBER) condition is
declared. See also Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).
Simplex (SX)
1. Operating a channel in one direction only with no ability to operate in the other direction.
2. One-sided printing.
SLC
Second Level Controller.
Single Longitudinal Mode (laser)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-51
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
SLM
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SML
1. Small Machine Language

2. Synchronous Maintenance Link
3. Service Management Layer
SMPS
Switched-Mode Power Supply

SNIDER
Asynchronous ASCII Echoplex Protocol (A trademark of Telcordia.)

SNML
Sub-etwork Management Layer

SNMP
Simple etwork Management Protocol

Software Generic
A set of files representing a software release for a Etwork element

SOH
Section Overhead
SOIC
Small Outline Integrated Circuit

SOM
Second of Minute
SONET
See Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET).

Span
1. Refers to the optical fiber(s) connecting one site to another site; that portion of a high-speed
digital system that connects a Central Office (CO) or terminal office to terminal office.
2. Also called a T-Span Line; a repeated outside plant four-wire, two twisted-pair transmission
line.
PRELIMINARY
3. A call center term: the total duration of a schedule from start time to stop time, including all
breaks.
SPE
Synchronous Payload Envelope. See also Synchronous Payloads.

SPI
Serial Peripheral Interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-52
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SPU
Shelf Processor Unit

SR
See Short Reach (SR).

SRAM
Static Random Access Memory
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
SRDM
Subrate Digital Multiplexing

SRM
Subrate Multiplexer. See also SM.

SSP
System Status Panel

SST
Secondary State
SSU
1. Subrate Service Unit

2. Synchronization Supply Unit. See also Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS).
ST

STBY
Standby
STC
STS-1 Transport Conditioner

STD
Standard
STE
Section-Terminating Equipment
STM-1
Synchronous Transport Module, level 1

STM-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-53
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
STM-16
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STM-64

STM-N
Synchronous Transport Module, Level

STP
STS-1 Transport Protect

STS Envelope Capacity
Bandwidth within and aligned to the Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) frame that carries the
STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE). This bandwidth can be combined from STS1s to
carry an STS-c SPE. See STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS SPE).
STS Path Overhead (STS POH)
ine evenly distributed path overhead bytes per 125 s starting at the first byte of the
Synchronous Transport Signal Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS SPE); provides for
communication between creation and disassembly points of the STS SPE.
STS Path-Terminating Equipment (STS PTE)
etwork elements that multiplex/demultiplex the Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) payload.
STS PTEs interpret and either modify or create the STS Path Overhead (STS POH) necessary to
transport the STS payload.
STS Payload Capacity
The maximum bandwidth within the Synchronous Transport Signal Synchronous Payload
Envelope (STS SPE) available for payload. See also STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS
SPE).
STS POH
See STS Path Overhead (STS POH).

STS PTE
See STS Path-Terminating Equipment (STS PTE).

STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS SPE)
A 125-s frame structure composed of Synchronous Transport Signal Path Overhead (STS POH)
and bandwidth for payload. See also STS Path Overhead (STS POH).
STS-1
PRELIMINARY
Synchronous Transport Signal, level 1; the basic logical building block Synchronous Optical
etwork (SOET) electrical signal with a rate of 51.84 Mb/s.
STS-12
Synchronous Transport Signal, level 12.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-54
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STS-12c
Concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal, level 12. A concatenated signal is formed by linking
12 STS-1 signals together, which allows transport of payloads larger than the capacity of an
STS-1. (Payloads larger than one STS-1 are known as superate payloads.) An STS-12c payload
consists of 2349 bytes (3 783).
STS-192
PRELIMINARY
Glossary

STS-3
Synchronous Transport Signal, level 3

STS-3c
Concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal, level 3. A concatenated signal is formed by linking 3

STS-1 signals together, which allows transport of payloads larger than the capacity of an STS-1.
(Payloads larger than one STS-1 are known as superate payloads.) An STS-3c payload consists of
2349 bytes (3 783).
STS-48

STS-48c
Concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal, level 48. A concatenated signal is formed by linking
48 STS-1 signals together, which allows transport of payloads larger than the capacity of an
STS-1. (Payloads larger than one STS-1 are known as superate payloads.) An STS-48c payload
consists of 2349 bytes (3 783).
STS-SPE
See STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS SPE) and STS Envelope Capacity.
SUD
Software Update Document

Superate Payload
Payload larger than one STS-1.

Superframe (SF)
One possible framing format for a DS1 signal (corresponding to D4). Unlike Extended
Superframe (ESF), there is no sync messaging channel in an SF signal. Compare with Extended
Superframe (ESF).
SVC
SYNC
Synchronous. Events that are phase and frequency locked to a common timing reference.
Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-55
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Switched Virtual Circuit. See also Virtual Circuit (VC).
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
See Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS).

Synchronous
The essential characteristic of time scales or signals in which their corresponding significant
instants occur at precisely the same average rate.
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
European set of standard fiber-optic-based serial standards planned for use with Synchronous
Optical etwork (SOET) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM); some SDH and SOET
standards are identical; standardized by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU). See
also Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) and Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET).
Synchronous Network
The synchronization of the payloads of a transmission system to a master (network) clock that can
be traced to a reference clock.
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
A family of fiber-optic transmission rates (51.84 Mb/s to 13.22 Gb/s), created to provide needed
flexibility to transport many digital signals with different capacities, and to provide a design
standard. SOET is an optical interface standard that allows interworking of transmission
products from multiple vendors; it defines physical interface, optical line rates (optical carrier
[OC] signals), frame format, and an Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning
(OAM&P) protocol. A standard for interconnecting digital networks and lightwave systems
agreed upon by most major manufacturers. SOET supports new broadband services, and
enhanced OAM&P. This standard permits connecting SOET-compatible equipment of one
manufacturer to SOET-compatible equipment of another manufacturer on the other end. All
present services, such as DS1s, DS2s, DS3s, LAs, etc., can be brought onto a hub and interfaced
with SOET.
Synchronous Payloads
Payloads derivable from a network transmission signal by removing integral numbers of bits in
every frame; (for example, there are no variable bit stuffing rate adjustments required to fit the
payload in the transmission signal).
Synchronous Signal
A signal associated with a clock, or timing, signal. Clock moves data from one point to another.
RZ signals are usually synchronous.
Synchronous Transport Module Level 1 (STM-1)
PRELIMINARY
The basic Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) logical building block electrical signal with a
rate of 155.520 Mb/s. European SDS building block that equates to STS3.
Synchronous Transport Signal Level 1 (STS1)
The basic Synchronous Optical etwork (SOET) logical building block electrical signal with a
rate of 51.84 Mb/s.
Synchronous Transport Signal Level N (STS-N)
This electrical signal is obtained by byte interleaving STS1 signals together. The rate of the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-56
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STS- is times 51.84 Mb/s.

System Identification/Network Service Access Point (SID/NSAP)
An alphanumeric designator that uniquely identifies a particular system or site within a network.
See also etwork Service Access Point (SAP).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
T0
Digital transmission link with a capacity of 64 kb/s (DS0)

T1
1. A collective term referring to the DS1 facility as a whole. Refers to traffic-carrying circuits.
2. Digital transmission link with a capacity of 1.544 Mb/s (DS1)
T3
1. A collective term referring to the DS3 facility as a whole. Refers to traffic-carrying circuits
rather than to modules.
2. Digital transmission link with a capacity of 44.736 Mb/s (DS3)
TAC
Technical Assistance Center

TAP
1. Test Access Port

2. Test Access Path
3. Trouble Analysis Procedures
TAP
Trouble Analysis Procedure.

Target Identifier (TID)
umber that may be null (missing). TIDs identify which network element receives a Transaction
Language 1 (TL1) message.
TARP
Target identifier Address Resolution Protocol

TCA
See Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA).
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A networking protocol that provides

communication across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware
architectures and various operating systems.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-57
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
TCP/IP
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TDM
1. Time Division Multiplexed

2. See also Time Division Multiplexing (TDM).
TEC
Thermo-Electric Cooler
Terminal
An end point or a device connected to same.

Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA)
Threshold crossing parameters are values assigned to specific types of error conditions. The
values represent the number of times that condition occurs within a 15-minute or 1-day time
frame. If the number of occurrences exceeds the threshold value, a TCA situation displays on the
appropriate Performance Monitoring (PM) screen. See also Performance Monitoring (PM).
TID
See Target Identifier (TID).

TIE
Time Interval Error

Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)
A type of multiplexing where two or more channels of information are transmitted over the same
link by allocating a different time interval ("slot" or "slice") for the transmission of each channel.
(For example: The channels take turns to use the link. Typically a periodic synchronizing signal or
distinguishing identifier is required so the receiver can determine which channel is which. TDM
becomes inefficient when traffic is intermittent because the time slot remains allocated even when
the channel has no data to transmit. Statistical TDM was developed to overcome this problem.
Time Slot
In time division multiplexing or switching, the slot belonging to a voice, data, or video
conversation; it can be occupied with conversation or left blank, but the slot is always present.
The capacity of the switch or the transmission channel can be determined by figuring how many
slots are present.
TIRKS
Trunks Integrated Record Keeping System (A registered trademark of Telcordia.)

TL1
PRELIMINARY
See Transaction Language 1 (TL1).

TMux
Transmultiplex, or the ability to convert M13 formatted DS3s into VT-mapped STS-1s and
visa-versa.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-58
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TOP
Task Oriented Practice

Transaction Language 1 (TL1)
A Telcordia-specified protocol for communication between network elements; a subset of CCITT

MML Standard.
Transport
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
Facilities associated with the transmission of OC1 or higher-level signals.

Transport Overhead
The overhead added to Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) Synchronous Payload Envelope
(SPE) for transport; consists of Line and Section overhead.
TS0
Time Slot Zero

TSC
Test Session Controller

TSI
Time Slot Interchange

TSS
Transport service switch

TX
Transmitter, transmit path

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UAP
User Access Privileges

UASCP
Unavailable Seconds-CP-bit Path

UASL
Unavailable Seconds-Line
UASP
Unavailable Seconds-Path
Unit Data Sheets

UEQ
Unequipped. Equipment entity is not equipped with necessary hardware.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-59
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
UDS
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UI
User Interface
UID
User Identifier
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
Unavailable Seconds (UAS)
The parameter UAS measures the duration for which service was unavailable (in seconds).
Service becomes unavailable if 10 consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (SES) occur. When the
service becomes unavailable, it remains unavailable until 10 consecutive nonseverely errored
seconds.
UNEQ-P
Unequipped-Path
Unequipped Channel
A portion of an STS- such as an STS1 Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE) or an intentionally

unoccupied Virtual Tributary (VT) SPE.
Unequipped Indication
A code that originating equipment places in unequipped channels to indicate to Path-Terminating

Equipment (PTE) that the channel is intentionally unoccupied so that alarms may be inhibited.
Unidirectional Ring (UDR)
Ring networks that send the same traffic over two different routes (for example, counter-rotating
paths) to each node in the network. This allows the node to select one direction or the other for its
own traffic for protection purposes. Rings send all traffic through each node. Rings also permit
add/drop of channels at any node using a T Mux.
Unidirectional Switching
The protection switching scheme whereby the failed path is switched to the protection path, but
the path in the other direction is not switched.
Unprotected Operation
A network element (usually a terminal) where the individual transport element does not provide
traffic protection; a higher network device, such as a cross-connect, provides protection by
moving the traffic from the failed transmission path to other paths in the network.
PRELIMINARY
UPC
A method used to polish the ends of fiber optic cables. This method produces a domed polish that
reduces back reflections up to -55dB.
UPPS
Unidirectional Path Protection Switching

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-60
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UPSR
Unidirectional Path Switched Ring

UPW
Urgent Product Warning

USB
Universal Serial Bus
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
USDB
User Security Database

User Channel
This is allocated to the user for input of information such as data communication for use in
maintenance activities and remoting of alarms external to the span equipment in a proprietary
fashion.
USI
User System Interface. More commonly referred to as Communication Interface Unit (CIU). Also
called CID or CPORT.
USI-LAN
User System Interface-Local Area etwork

USM
User Services Manager

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VC
1. Virtual Channel
2. Virtual Container
3. See also Virtual Circuit (VC).
4. Virtual Concatenation
VCAT
Virtual Concatenation
VCG
Virtual Concatenation Group
Virtual Channel umber

VI
Valid Interrupt
Violation Monitoring and Removal (VMR)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-61
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
VCN
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Process by which parity errors are corrected at a switch and section. Equivalent to an infinite stop
filter in a Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) system. Only parity violations are removed;
the bit errors that caused them still exist. Detected violations are removed so they do not
propagate beyond maintenance span.
Virtual Circuit (VC)
A communications line, voice or data, that appears to the user to be a dedicated point-to-point
circuit. VCs are generally set up on a per call basis and disconnected when the call is ended; VC
concept was first used in data communications with packet switching; VCs have become more
common in ultra-high speed applications; VC is referred to as a logical, rather than physical path
for a call.
Virtual Tributary (VT)
A structure designed for transport and switching of sub-DS3 payloads. A unit of sub-SOET
bandwidth that can be combined, or concatenated, for transmission through the network; VT1.5
equals 1.544 Mb/s; VT2 equals 2,048 Mb/s; VT3 equals 3 Mb/s; VT6 equals 6 Mb/s.
Virtual Tributary Group (VTG)
A 9-row by 12-column structure (108 bytes) that carries one or more Virtual Tributaries (VTs) of
the same size. Seven VT groups (756 bytes) are byte interleaved within the VT-structured
Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE).
Virtual Tributary, Path Overhead (V5)
One path overhead for every 500 s located at the first byte of the Virtual Tributary, Synchronous
Payload Envelope (VT SPE). VT path overhead provides for communication between point of
creation and point of disassembly of a VT SPE.
Virtual Tributary, Path-Terminating Equipment (VT PTE)
etwork elements that multiplex/demultiplex the Virtual Tributary (VT) payload. VT PTEs
interpret and either modify or create the path overhead necessary to transport VT payload. A VT
PTE is considered a Synchronous Transport Signal Path-Terminating Equipment (STS PTE), a
Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE), and/or a Section-Terminating Equipment (STE).
Virtual Tributary, Synchronous Payload Envelope (VT SPE)
A 500-s frame structure carried by the VT is composed of VT path overhead and bandwidth for
payload; envelope is contained within and can have any alignment with respect to VT envelope
capacity. The term typically refers to VT1.5, VT2, VT3, VT6, and VTx-c SPEs.
VLR
PRELIMINARY
1. Very Long Reach.

2. Visitors Location Register. A wireless telecommunications term; refers to local database
maintained by cellular provider.
VOA
Variable Optical Attenuator
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-62
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VSCC
Virtual Tributary/Synchronous Transport Signal (level 1) Cross-Connect

VT
See Virtual Tributary (VT).

VT Payload Capacity
The maximum bandwidth within the Virtual Tributary (VT) Synchronous Payload Envelope
(SPE) that is available for payload.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
VT PTE
See Virtual Tributary, Path-Terminating Equipment (VT PTE).

VT SPE
See Virtual Tributary, Synchronous Payload Envelope (VT SPE).

VT Superframe
The Virtual Tributary (VT) is organized into a 500-s superframe structure overlaid on and
aligned to the 125-s STS1 Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE), which contains the VT
payload pointer and the VT SPE.
VT1
Virtual Tributary 1.
VT1.5
Virtual Tributary 1.5 (1.728 Mb/s).

VT2
Virtual Tributary level 2.

VTG
See Virtual Tributary Group (VTG).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WAN
Wide-Area etwork.
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplex (-er, -ing).

Workstation (WS)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
X-bits
Two overhead bits per DS3 M-frame used as an alarm channel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
GL-63
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Any one of a variety of Visual Display Terminals (VDTs), ranging from a simple
keyboard/monitor to an intelligent, processor-controlled VDT.
PRELIMINARY
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
XBP
X-Bit Processing
XFP
10 Gigabit small form factor pluggable

XLR
See Extra Long Reach (XLR)

XMT
Transmit module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ZIC
PRELIMINARY
Zero Installation Craft interface. An E-imbedded graphical user interface (GUI) application for
local operation and maintenance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
GL-64
A access privileges, 1-2
PRELIMINARY
Index
alarmprofile rename, 17-14
accessctrl show info, 17-19
alarmprofile show, 17-15
administrator backup, 19-5
severitydef config, 17-11
administrator config, 19-1
severitydef show, 17-12
administrator resourcefile load,

19-3
administrator restore, 19-5
administrator show, 19-2
agent address management
ne show addr, 18-2
agent management
accessctrl show info, 17-19
ne label, 17-17
ne location, 17-16
ne mgr, 17-17
ne show info, 17-18
alarm list and log management
alarmlist, 17-3
alarmsynth, 17-5
log alarm, 17-6
log event, 17-8
alarm profile management

alarmprofile config, 17-14
alarmprofile create, 17-12
alarmprofile delete, 17-13
bridge vlanprotprofile show,

7-17
bridge port show info, 7-12
alarmprofile config, 17-14
bridge port vlanprotprofile bind,

7-14
alarmprofile create, 17-12
bridge qos mode, 7-2
alarmprofile delete, 17-13
bridge show type, 7-2
alarmprofile rename, 17-14
bridge type, 7-1
alarmprofile show, 17-15
bridge vlan activate, 7-3
alarmsynth, 17-5
bridge vlan add, 7-6
auto provisioning
bridge vlan delete, 7-5
plugandplay, 17-20
bridge vlan remove, 7-7
plugandplay show, 17-21
bridge vlan show, 7-9
.............................................................
B bridge port config, 7-10
bridge port management
bridge vlanprotprofile activate,

7-16
bridge vlanprotprofile bind, 7-14
bridge port config, 7-10
bridge vlanprotprofile default,

7-15
bridge port show info, 7-12
bridge vlanprotprofile delete, 7-17
bridge port vlanprotprofile

bind, 7-14
bridge vlanprotprofile show, 7-17
bridge vlanprotprofile activate,

7-16
bridge vlanprotprofile bind,
7-14
bridge vlanprotprofile default,
7-15
bridgedbfiltering activate mac, 8-5

bridgedbfiltering agetime, 8-1
bridgedbfiltering delete mac, 8-4
bridgedbfiltering show agetime,
8-2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
IN-1
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
log info, 17-6
alarmlist, 17-3
bridge vlanprotprofile delete,

7-17
PRELIMINARY
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
bridgedbfiltering show info, 8-3
.............................................................
extpoint out criteria, 2-22
bridgedbfiltering show
multicast-dynamic, 8-10
E eqpt position
extpoint out userlabel, 2-21
asap, 2-6
extpoint show in, 2-20
reset, 2-11
extpoint show out, 2-23
unicast-dynamic, 8-7
show allowedeqpt, 2-7
extpoint show outeventslist,

2-24
unicast-static, 8-8
show info, 2-9
multicast-static, 8-9
bridgedbfiltering vlan config, 8-3

.............................................................
C cbpdu activate port, 6-25
cepst activate port, 6-27

cepst deactivate, 6-28
CLI access privileges, 1-2
colorprofile activate, 5-6
colorprofile delete, 5-7
colorprofile show, 5-8
show ri, 2-10

show type, 2-5
type, 2-2
eqpt prot manualswitch, 2-16
eqpt prot show unit, 2-17
eqpt show allpositions, 2-12
eqpt show linkstatus, 2-14
eqpt show nename, 2-15
equipment management
commands
.............................................................
eqpt position asap, 2-6
D debug commands
eqpt position reset, 2-11
debug mgrcli show info, 20-2

debug ne show info, 20-1
debug trap show info, 20-2
debug mgrcli show info, 20-2
debug ne show info, 20-1
debug trap show info, 20-2
dual-homing management
cbpdu activate port, 6-25
cepst activate port, 6-27
cepst deactivate, 6-28
PRELIMINARY
show asap, 2-6
sbpdu activate port, 6-29

vrrp activate, 6-31
Ethernet filtering database entries

management
bridgedbfiltering activate mac,
8-5
bridgedbfiltering delete mac,
8-4
multicast-dynamic, 8-10
multicast-static, 8-9
unicast-dynamic, 8-7
unicast-static, 8-8
Ethernet filtering database general
parameters
eqpt position show

allowedeqpt, 2-7
bridgedbfiltering agetime, 8-1
eqpt position show asap, 2-6
agetime, 8-2
eqpt position show info, 2-9

eqpt position show ri, 2-10
eqpt position show type, 2-5
eqpt position type, 2-2
eqpt prot manualswitch, 2-16
eqpt prot show unit, 2-17
eqpt show allpositions, 2-12
eqpt show linkstatus, 2-14
eqpt show nename, 2-15
extpoint in asap, 2-18
extpoint in show asap, 2-19
extpoint in userlabel, 2-18
bridgedbfiltering show info,

8-3
bridgedbfiltering vlan config,
8-3
Ethernet flow classifiers
inflowclassifier add, 5-2
inflowclassifier remove, 5-4
inflowclassifier show, 5-5
Ethernet link OAM
linkoam position, 12-2
linkoam position config, 12-2
linkoam position eventconfig,
12-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
IN-2
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
linkoam position
remoteloopback, 12-5
linkoam position show
eventconfig, 12-6
linkoamtstats, 12-4
localeth, 12-3
linkoam position show log,
12-7
linkoam position show peereth,
12-4
Ethernet OAM
ethoam activate, 13-2
ethoam config, 13-2
ethoam delete, 13-3
ethoam etype config, 13-15
ethoam etype show, 13-15
ethoam md activate, 13-4
ethoam md config, 13-5
ethoam md delete, 13-5
ethoam md show, 13-6

ethoam show, 13-3
interface position localeth
autoneg, 3-9
autoneg advertisedcapability,
3-10
autoneg restart, 3-10
defaulttype, 3-6
rcfcsfaction, 3-12
rcfssfaction, 3-13
show autoneg, 3-11
show mauinfo, 3-8
show rcfaction, 3-14
ethoam md ma delete, 13-10

show trafficconditioning,
3-15
ethoam md ma linktrace
remote, 13-13

trafficstatus, 3-14
ethoam md ma add, 13-6
ethoam md ma linktrace show,

13-14
Ethernet port management over

GFP
ethoam md ma loopback
remote, 13-12
interface position remoteeth,

4-11
ethoam md ma loopback show,

13-13
interface position remoteeth

config, 4-14
ethoam md ma mep activate

port, 13-8

maxmtu, 4-13
ethoam md ma mep config

port, 13-9

portservice, 4-12
ethoam md ma remove, 13-7

ethoam md ma show, 13-11

GFP, LAPS
show ethinfo, 4-15
MAU
interface position localeth, 4-3
config, 4-7
defaultflowcontrol, 4-6
ethasap, 4-7
maxmtu, 4-5
portservice, 4-4
show ethinfo, 4-9
Ethernet QOS color profile
management
colorprofile activate, 5-6
colorprofile delete, 5-7
colorprofile show, 5-8
Ethernet QOS traffic descriptor
management
trafficdescriptor activate, 5-9
trafficdescriptor config, 5-11
trafficdescriptor delete, 5-11
trafficdescriptor show, 5-12
ethoam activate, 13-2
ethoam config, 13-2
ethoam delete, 13-3
ethoam etype config, 13-15
ethoam etype show, 13-15
ethoam md activate, 13-4
ethoam md config, 13-5
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
IN-3
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ethoam md delete, 13-5

ethoam md ma add, 13-6
ethoam md ma delete, 13-10
ethoam md ma linktrace remote,
13-13
ethoam md ma linktrace show,
13-14
ethoam md ma loopback remote,
13-12
ethoam md ma loopback show,
13-13
ethoam md ma mep activate port,
13-8
ethoam md ma mep config port,
13-9

show trafficconditioning,
3-20
pbflowinunidir activate port,

6-15
interface position remoteeth sl,

3-17
pbflowinunidir config, 6-19

trafficstatus, 3-20
pbflowinunidir delete, 6-20
glossary, GL-1
pbflowinunidir show, 6-20

extpoint in asap, 2-18
extpoint in show asap, 2-19
.............................................................
I
in-fiber in-band management
extpoint in userlabel, 2-18
infiberinband activate, 18-3
extpoint out criteria, 2-22
infiberinband delete, 18-4
extpoint out userlabel, 2-21
infiberinband show, 18-5
extpoint show in, 2-20
infiberinband activate, 18-3
ethoam md ma remove, 13-7
extpoint show out, 2-23
infiberinband delete, 18-4
ethoam md ma show, 13-11
extpoint show outeventslist, 2-24
infiberinband show, 18-5
ethoam md show, 13-6
.............................................................
inflowclassifier add, 5-2
ethoam show, 13-3
F flow show, 6-3
ETS-to-ETS bidirectional
transparent mapping
.............................................................
portportbid activate, 6-12

portportbid delete, 6-13
portportbid show, 6-14
ETS-to-Provider bridge
bidirectional flow management
pbflowbid activate port, 6-5
pbflowbid config, 6-9
pbflowbid delete, 6-10
pbflowbid show, 6-10
PRELIMINARY
ETS-to-Provider bridge ETS

ingress unidirectional flow
management
ETS-to-Provider bridge ETS

egress unidirectional flow
management
pbflowoutunidir activate, 6-21
pbflowoutunidir delete, 6-23
pbflowoutunidir show, 6-23
G General flow management
flow show, 6-3

general interface management
interface show, 3-3, 3-4
generic MAC/Virtual/Provider
QOS commands
bridge qos mode, 7-2
bridge show type, 7-2
bridge type, 7-1
GFP management
asap, 3-19
csf, 3-18
show mappinginfo, 3-21
inflowclassifier remove, 5-4

inflowclassifier show, 5-5
interface position, 3-6, 3-21
l2ctrlframe, 4-22
localeth, 4-3
localeth autoneg, 3-9
localeth autoneg
advertisedcapability, 3-10
localeth autoneg restart, 3-10
localeth config, 4-7
localeth defaultflowcontrol,
4-6
localeth ethasap, 4-7
localeth maxmtu, 4-5
localeth pdh config, 3-29
localeth pdh crc, 3-24
localeth pdh lbo, 3-26
localeth pdh linecoding, 3-27
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
IN-4
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
localeth pdh rate, 3-23
IP routing
localeth pdh rxsensitivity, 3-25
routingstatic activate, 18-6
localeth pdh show, 3-30
routingstatic delete, 18-7
localeth pdh signalmode, 3-28
routingstatic show, 18-8
localeth portservice, 4-4
.............................................................
localeth rcfcsfaction, 3-12
L link aggregation management
localeth rcfssfaction, 3-13
linkagg activate, 10-2
localeth show autoneg, 3-11
linkagg config, 10-3
localeth show ethinfo, 4-9
linkagg config neprio, 10-5
localeth show mauinfo, 3-8
linkagg delete lag, 10-5
localeth show rcfaction, 3-14
linkagg port bind, 10-6
localeth show
trafficconditioning, 3-15
linkagg port config pri, 10-7
remoteeth, 4-11
remoteeth asap, 3-19
remoteeth config, 4-14
remoteeth csf, 3-18
remoteeth maxmtu, 4-13
remoteeth portservice, 4-12
remoteeth show ethinfo, 4-15
linkagg port show info, 10-8

linkagg port unbind, 10-8
linkagg show, 10-6
linkagg activate, 10-2
linkagg config, 10-3
linkagg config neprio, 10-5
linkagg delete lag, 10-5
linkagg port bind, 10-6
remoteeth show
trafficconditioning, 3-20
linkagg port config pri, 10-7
remoteeth sl, 3-17
linkagg port show info, 10-8
remoteeth trafficstatus, 3-20
linkagg port unbind, 10-8
show l2ctrlframe, 4-26
linkagg show, 10-6
show vlanprotprofile, 4-24
linkoam position, 12-2
show vlanset, 4-25
linkoam position config, 12-2
vlanprotprofile activate, 4-20
linkoam position eventconfig, 12-5
vlanprotprofile bind, 4-17
linkoam position remoteloopback,

12-5
vlanprotprofile default, 4-19

vlanprotprofile show, 4-21
[enable | disable], 3-14
interface show, 3-3
interface trafficshow, 3-4
linkoam position show log, 12-7

linkoam position show peereth,
12-4
log alarm, 17-6
log event, 17-8
log info, 17-6
.............................................................
M maintenance measurement
commands
pmmaint show ethphy, 16-4
pmmaint show port, 16-2
pmmaint show service, 16-3
mstp cist config, 9-13
mstp cist port config, 9-21
mstp cist port show info, 9-23
mstp cist show info, 9-14
mstp msti activate, 9-15
mstp msti config, 9-16
mstp msti delete, 9-16
mstp msti port config, 9-24
mstp msti port show info, 9-26
mstp msti show info, 9-17
mstp msti vlan, 9-19
mstp region, 9-11
mstp show msti, 9-19
mstp show region, 9-12
mstp show vlan, 9-20
.............................................................
N ne label, 17-17

eventconfig, 12-6
ne location, 17-16

linkoamtstats, 12-4
ne show addr, 18-2
ne mgr, 17-17
ne show info, 17-18
linkoam position show localeth,

12-3
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
IN-5
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................
pmqos service config, 16-10
P pbflowbid activate port, 6-5
pmqos service delete, 16-11
pbflowbid config, 6-9

pbflowbid delete, 6-10
pbflowbid show, 6-10
pbflowinunidir activate port, 6-15
pmqos service show historydata,

16-12
port segregation management
pbflowinunidir config, 6-19
portseg activate, 11-1
pbflowinunidir delete, 6-20
portseg add port, 11-2
pbflowinunidir show, 6-20
portseg delete, 11-4
pbflowoutunidir activate, 6-21
portseg remove port, 11-3
pbflowoutunidir delete, 6-23
portseg show info, 11-5
pbflowoutunidir show, 6-23
portportbid activate, 6-12
PDH module management
portportbid delete, 6-13
interface pdh config, 3-29
portportbid show, 6-14
interface pdh crc, 3-24
portseg activate, 11-1
interface pdh lbo, 3-26
portseg add port, 11-2
interface pdh linecoding, 3-27
portseg delete, 11-4
interface pdh rxsensitivity,

3-25
interface pdh show, 3-30
interface pdh signalmode, 3-28
interface position localeth pdh
rate, 3-23
portseg remove port, 11-3

portseg show info, 11-5
privileges, 1-2
.............................................................
Q QOS measurement commands
plugandplay, 17-20
pmqos port activate, 16-5
plugandplay show, 17-21
pmqos port config, 16-8
pmmaint show ethphy, 16-4
pmqos port delete, 16-6
pmmaint show port, 16-2
pmqos port show, 16-7
pmmaint show service, 16-3
pmqos port show historydata,

16-9
pmqos port activate, 16-5

pmqos port config, 16-8
PRELIMINARY
pmqos service show currentdata,

16-11
pmqos port delete, 16-6

pmqos port show, 16-7
pmqos port show historydata, 16-9
pmqos service activate, 16-10
pmqos service activate, 16-10

pmqos service config, 16-10
pmqos service delete, 16-11
pmqos service show
currentdata, 16-11
pmqos service show

historydata, 16-12
QOS port bind, 15-10
QOS port config, 15-7
QOS port disable, 15-6
QOS port enable, 15-5
QOS port show, 15-9
QOS port show service, 15-13
QOS port unbind, 15-11
QOS port vt config queue, 15-15
QOS port vt show queue, 15-17
QOS position portshaping, 15-3
QOS position show, 15-4
qos wred activate, 15-18
qos wred config, 15-19
qos wred delete, 15-21
qos wred show, 15-21
.............................................................
R routingstatic activate, 18-6
routingstatic delete, 18-7

routingstatic show, 18-8
.............................................................
S sbpdu activate port, 6-29
severitydef config, 17-11

severitydef show, 17-12
Spanning Tree Protocol
management
mstp cist config, 9-13
mstp cist port config, 9-21
mstp cist port show info, 9-23
mstp cist show info, 9-14
mstp msti activate, 9-15
mstp msti config, 9-16
mstp msti delete, 9-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
IN-6
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
mstp msti port config, 9-24
administrator show, 19-2
mstp msti port show info, 9-26
view, 19-3
mstp msti show info, 9-17
.............................................................
mstp msti vlan, 9-19
V view, 19-3
mstp region, 9-11

mstp show msti, 9-19
virtual output port management
mstp show region, 9-12
QOS position portshaping,

15-3
mstp show vlan, 9-20
QOS position show, 15-4
interface position
vlanprotprofile default, 4-19
interface position
vlanprotprofile delete, 4-28
VLA registration entry
management
stp config, 9-4
virtual transport management
stp disable, 9-3
QOS port bind, 15-10
bridge vlan add, 7-6
stp enable, 9-2
QOS port config, 15-7
bridge vlan delete, 7-5
stp port config, 9-7
QOS port disable, 15-6
bridge vlan remove, 7-7
stp port show info, 9-9
QOS port enable, 15-5
bridge vlan show, 7-9
stp show info, 9-6
QOS port show, 15-9
stp show type, 9-3
QOS port show service, 15-13
vlanprotprofile delete, 4-28
QOS port unbind, 15-11
stp config, 9-4

stp disable, 9-3
stp enable, 9-2
stp port config, 9-7
stp port show info, 9-9
stp show info, 9-6
stp show type, 9-3
.............................................................
T trafficdescriptor activate, 5-9
trafficdescriptor config, 5-11

trafficdescriptor delete, 5-11
trafficdescriptor show, 5-12
.............................................................
U utility commands
administrator backup, 19-5

administrator config, 19-1
administrator resourcefile load,
19-3
administrator restore, 19-5
virtual transport queue

management
QOS port vt show queue,
15-17
QOS portvt config queue,
15-15
VLA profile and Layer2 frames
management
interface position l2ctrlframe,
4-22
bridge vlan activate, 7-3
vpls activate, 14-2

vpls add, 14-4
vpls config, 14-3
vpls delete, 14-3
VPLS Management
vpls activate, 14-2
vpls add, 14-4
vpls config, 14-3
interface position show

l2ctrlframe, 4-26
vpls delete, 14-3

vlanprotprofile, 4-24
vpls show, 14-4

vlanset, 4-25
interface position
interface position
vlanprotprofile bind, 4-17
vpls remove, 14-5
vpls static add mac port, 14-6

vpls static remove mac port,
14-7
vpls static show mac port, 14-8
vpls remove, 14-5
vpls show, 14-4
vpls static add mac port, 14-6
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
IN-7
Issue 1 June 2009
PRELIMINARY
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vpls static remove mac port, 14-7

vpls static show mac port, 14-8
vrrp activate, 6-31
.............................................................
W WRED profile management
qos wred activate, 15-18

qos wred config, 15-19
qos wred delete, 15-21
PRELIMINARY
qos wred show, 15-21
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG09019EAAATQZZA
Issue 1 June 2009
IN-8

Command Line Interface Guide R3.1 PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Command Line Interface Guide R3.1 PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

Proprietary Use pursuant to Company instruction

About this document

The help command .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-9

Equipment management commands

eqpt position naming_set_list show type

eqpt position naming_set_list asap asap_userlabel

eqpt position naming_set_list type eqpt_type

eqpt position naming_set_list show asap

eqpt position naming_set_list show allowedeqpt .................................................................................................. 2-7

eqpt prot manualswitch from naming to naming

extpoint in extpointin_naming userlabel extpoint_userlabel

extpoint out extpointout_naming criteria {manual | remote | auto {eventtype_id |

extpoint show outeventslist .................................................................................................................................................. 2-24

Ethernet physical and GFP management commands

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-3

interface trafficshow [naming_set_list]

Ethernet physical management

interface position naming_set_list localeth defaulttype

interface position naming_set_list localeth show mauinfo

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg {enable | disable} ........................................................ 3-9

interface position naming_set_list localeth autoneg advertisedcapability

interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfcsfaction {none | shutdown}

interface position naming_set_list localeth rcfssfaction {none | shutdown} ............................................ 3-13

interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set localeth trafficstatus {enable | disable} ........ 3-14

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth sl {auto | eqptnonspec}

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth asap asap_userlabel

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth trafficstatus {enable | disable}

Ethernet over PDH module management

interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh lbo lbo_value ................................................................. 3-26

interface position naming_set_list localeth pdh config

Ethernet port management commands

interface position naming_set_list localeth portservice {ets | bridge | mpls}

interface position naming_set_list localeth defaultflowcontrol {nopause | asympause |

interface position naming_set_list localeth show ethinfo

Ethernet port management over GFP

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth {activate | deactivate} .......................................................... 4-11

interface position naming_set_list remoteeth show ethinfo

VLA profile and Layer2 frames management

interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set vlanprotprofile bind

interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set vlanprotprofile default ........................................ 4-19

interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set l2ctrlframe

interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show vlanprotprofile

interface position naming_set_list_lagnumber_set show vlanset ........................................................... 4-25

vlanprotprofile delete vlanprotprof_userlabel

vlanprotprofile show [vlanprotprof_userlabel]

Ethernet flow and Ethernet flow QOS management commands

inflowclassifier remove classifier_id

inflowclassifier show [flow_userlabel]

colorprofile show [colorprof_userlabel]

trafficdescriptor show [trafficdescriptor_userlabel] ............................................................................... 5-12

trafficdescriptor config [trafficdescriptor_userlabel] ............................................................................. 5-11

Services management commands

ETS-to-Provider bridge ETS/PW/VPLS bidirectional flow

pbflowbid config flow_userlabel

pbflowbid delete flow_userlabel

pbflowbid show [flow_userlabel] [flowtype { pb | pw | vpls }]

ETS-to-ETS bidirectional transparent mapping

portportbid activate flow_userlabel port1 naming port2 naming

portportbid delete flow_userlabel

portportbid show [flow_userlabel]

ETS-to-Provider bridge ETS/PW/VPLS ingress unidirectional flow

pbflowinunidir activate flow_userlabel port